Business RadioX ®

  • Home
  • Business RadioX ® Communities
    • Southeast
      • Alabama
        • Birmingham
      • Florida
        • Orlando
        • Pensacola
        • South Florida
        • Tampa
        • Tallahassee
      • Georgia
        • Atlanta
        • Cherokee
        • Forsyth
        • Greater Perimeter
        • Gwinnett
        • North Fulton
        • North Georgia
        • Northeast Georgia
        • Rome
        • Savannah
      • Louisiana
        • New Orleans
      • North Carolina
        • Charlotte
        • Raleigh
      • Tennessee
        • Chattanooga
        • Nashville
      • Virginia
        • Richmond
    • South Central
      • Arkansas
        • Northwest Arkansas
    • Midwest
      • Illinois
        • Chicago
      • Michigan
        • Detroit
      • Minnesota
        • Minneapolis St. Paul
      • Missouri
        • St. Louis
      • Ohio
        • Cleveland
        • Columbus
        • Dayton
    • Southwest
      • Arizona
        • Phoenix
        • Tucson
        • Valley
      • Texas
        • Austin
        • Dallas
        • Houston
    • West
      • California
        • Bay Area
        • LA
        • Pasadena
      • Colorado
        • Denver
      • Hawaii
        • Oahu
  • FAQs
  • About Us
    • Our Mission
    • Our Audience
    • Why It Works
    • What People Are Saying
    • BRX in the News
  • Resources
    • BRX Pro Tips
    • B2B Marketing: The 4Rs
    • High Velocity Selling Habits
    • Why Most B2B Media Strategies Fail
    • 9 Reasons To Sponsor A Business RadioX ® Show
  • Partner With Us
  • Veteran Business RadioX ®

How To Sell a Wireless Cell Phone Store, with Tamer Shoukry, Wireless Dealerz

February 28, 2023 by John Ray

Tamer Shoukry
How to Sell a Business
How To Sell a Wireless Cell Phone Store, with Tamer Shoukry, Wireless Dealerz
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Tamer Shoukry

How To Sell a Wireless Cell Phone Store, with Tamer Shoukry, Wireless Dealerz (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 13)

There is more to a wireless store than just a storefront selling and repairing cell phones. On this edition of How To Sell a Business Podcast, Tamer Shoukry, owner of Wireless Dealerz, talked with host Ed Mysogland about how he got into the business and gave an overview of the industry. They discussed the flow of cellphones from dealer to consumer and from the US to other countries. Tamer covered how they make their money, margins, the challenges of retaining techs and managing inventory, why wireless dealers don’t usually get SBA loans, his advice as a business broker, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

Tamer Shoukry, Owner, Wireless Dealerz

Tamer Shoukry, Owner, Wireless Dealerz

Tamer Shoukry AKA Mr. Wireless Ohio Wholesale had been a leader in the Prepaid Wireless Marketing , Sales and Fulfillment. He has assisted many leading Prepaid brands in Establishing Their Markets since 2006 such as Page Plus, Boost Mobile, Simple Mobile and H2O.

Sign up for any of these services and work directly with him and ENSURE  success in implementing these services. Tamer posseses the experience, know-how and connections to make these services increase a shop’s income.

Tamer started in the wireless industry in 2006 when he started in regional sales which allowed him to build a network of small and medium sized wireless retailers. He moved into selling in bulk to small carriers, started a repair business, and also started a wireless repair school.

In 2o15 Tamer started his wireless software company that serves independent wireless dealers.

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Instagram

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business podcast, where, every week, we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors, and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:35] On today’s episode, I had the opportunity to visit with Tamer Shoukry. And Tamer is a business broker out of Ohio, and his claim to fame is Mr. Wireless. And it’s funny during our interview, I was thinking I was talking about wireless stores. And what I didn’t realize is just how deep that business goes. And what I’m saying is the resale market. I’m thinking we’re talking about new cell phone sales and products and services. But it was so much more than that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:17] So, it was a fascinating interview. And I’m certain that you will sit there and never look at another wireless store without going, “Wow, I had no idea.” So, my point is, it’s a good one. And so, I hope you enjoy my conversation with Tamer Shoukry.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:35] I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. On this podcast, I interview buyers, sellers, dealmakers, and other professional advisors about what creates value in a business and then how can that business be effectively sold for a premium value.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:48] On today’s show, like I indicated in my introduction, I’m really excited about Tamer Shoukry, who’s known as Mr. Wireless. And so, you can imagine to get that moniker, that is a real special person. And this industry is not quite what you might think. You think of it as a retail operation, but it really is so much more than that. So, Tamer, welcome.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:02:16] Well, thank you. Ed, thank you so much for having me today. I really appreciate that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:20] Well, I didn’t do your practice justice, so I was hoping that maybe you could talk a little bit about the work that you’re doing and your practice and your specialty.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:02:37] Awesome. Awesome. Well, in 2006, I started working for this nationwide distributor for wireless products. And, basically, what they did, they made me travel city to city, state to state, especially Indiana, to sell their product, which was Boost Mobile and Page Plus. And I had to go and flourish the markets. The market would not be familiar with these products, so I would move and I would spend weeks there until everybody starts selling this product, other retailers will start pushing the products.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:03:17] And that gave me a very, very strong stronghold when it comes to networking with small business owners who own retail shops, you know, corner shops, gas stations, all these mom and shop businesses, and bigger size retailers to introduce the products to them.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:03:40] I spent three years there and then I decided to start my own distribution company, that was in 2009. I became the master dealer for Boost Mobile, and number one distributor in the Midwest. So, we grew up from there. And then, I started selling devices in bulk to small carriers. So, smaller carriers will buy 5,000, 10,000, 20,000 devices per month, so I focused on this side of the business.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:04:14] Later on, in 2012, I started the first repair store in my area in Dublin, Hilliard, Ohio. And after one year, I started a cell phone repair school in Houston, Texas. And after that, I came back to Ohio. After three years, I came back to Ohio, and I started a little wireless software company that serves cell phone stores. So, I have a very good existence in the wireless industry in the country and overseas.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:49] I would say. So, I guess the first place I would want to start – and I know this is a big ask – what’s the overview of the industry? Because like we were talking about before we got started, I mean, it’s not necessarily what everybody thinks that it’s just a retail operation. So, can you kind of give me a little bit of an overview on that?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:05:13] Sure. Yeah. The cell phone service or the telecom service is part of the infrastructure of any country and everybody is getting the service, any business, any field, medical, industrial, science, education. Everybody is using the wireless industry. And when it comes like this, you find yourself in a situation. There is always high demand on these kind of services and there is not enough people providing the service. You can imagine —

Ed Mysogland: [00:05:48] How is that? Is that true? I mean, how does that work? What you were saying was that there’s not enough people providing the service, I mean, what does that mean?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:06:00] Well, if you look at the country here, we have mainly, like, three or four major carriers – you know them – and they’re providing the airtime. And then, you have the dealers or retailers who are working under them providing the service. And then, you have the repair shops that do repairs for the devices when they have any problems or issues. And then, you have companies producing the devices, you know, Apple, Samsung, whatever. So, there is always high demand and there is not enough devices. I don’t think there’s enough devices in the market.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:38] Really?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:06:40] Yes.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:40] That was what caught my ear. I’m like, “Wow. There’s not enough devices in the market.” And as large as this market is, that’s a staggering statement. But you would know.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:58] So, we have the market now. And I guess, when you think of a wireless operation – because when you were talking a little bit about your practice, you are not only talking about retail operations, but you were also talking about in truck stops, gas stations, things like that, where those are respective profit centers – tell me what does that look like, the mechanics of that. I know from a retail store, but does the retail store then go and sell to the truck stop? Or is there some other operation that has the cornerstone on that type of business? You know what I mean?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:07:47] Very, very good question. This industry is not stable. It’s changing every other year. It’s changing dramatically. So, back in the days when I started, we used to sell in corner stores. We used to sell in barbershops. We sell the device activated already with airtime, so you just turn on the phone and it has minutes and you can start talking and texting.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:08:11] But, now, all these venues start shrinking. But we have something new or we have the repair shops. The repair shop will be independent, will be providing services like fixing devices, activating new lines, and doing more than that. With the high price of the devices now, it becomes more like a car dealership. And this is the real — in the business, when you buy broken phones, fix them, and resell them. Huge margin. It’s more than anything you can imagine.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:54] Now, I’m following you. So, where do you sell the repaired phones? Do you now turn online? Or are you getting foot traffic? Where is the source of that profit center?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:09:08] Okay. Perfect. So, if somebody who owns a store, usually the customer would walk into the store and they will ask do you have any affordable iPhone, for example, I don’t want to pay the full price. I said I have this model, I have that model. It sometimes will be like 30 percent off, 50 percent off from buying a brand new one. So, he would sell this, or he would sell them online, or he will export all the devices overseas for higher margin.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:42] I get it. So, how do you – yeah. Go ahead. I’m sorry.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:09:45] So, you have some company that is selling, let’s say, 100 phones a month and some other companies selling 20,000, 50,000 phones for a month. You have this size and you have that bigger —

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:01] Sure. So, what’s a good size as far as revenue goes? What’s a reasonable operation? I mean, is that a half-a-million dollar revenue store? Or is that a $5 million revenue store?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:10:18] Usually, the independent one, the repair shops, they would be between 50 to mil. Some of them can reach mil. Especially if you’re in a busy city like New York, you can reach this number. The other bigger size companies, they do not do retail. They don’t face the end user. They would collect the devices, repair them, and then send them overseas for higher prices. And that margin will go up to $300, 400, 500 million.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:57] Wow. So, the companies you just referenced, the ones that are buying up the damaged and subsequently repaired phones, they’re going around to all these shops saying, “Hey, I want to buy your damaged phones.” They refurb them and then sell them, right? That’s how that works?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:11:19] This one of the venues they do this. And the other way is they go directly to the carriers, because carriers will always — returns. And they will buy it through an auction. And the auction is not for everyone. You need to get certain certifications, like the R2 Certification, to be able to participate on those auctions.

Ed Mysogland: [00:11:45] So, what’s an R2 Certification? What does that mean?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:11:48] Responsible Recycling Certification. It’s very similar to the — but it comes to the electronics.

Ed Mysogland: [00:11:58] I got it. So, I’m based here in Indianapolis and so I know that there’s all kinds of retail operations that are selling phones, so that’s easy. But what about the folks that you just mentioned, the ones that are approved by the vendor to collect the phones, I mean, is that a big market? I mean, is there five people or 50 people that are buying up these phones?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:12:28] No. No. I would say the certified companies would be around maybe 30 certified. It’s not a big number. I can tell you the names of the owners of each company very easy because they don’t change that much. They don’t go out of business that quickly. I’d never seen any one of those companies dealing with the assets on the large scale getting sold. I never seen that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:03] Yeah. Those kind of margins, I’d hold them too. I wouldn’t sell it.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:13:09] There’s only a few companies that are the biggest companies. They’re going with billions of dollars. They got sold to private equities and entities like that. So, as I wanted to mention to you, it’s not only the small shop in front of you that one guy is working there. No. It goes way, way beyond that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:33] Sure. No, no, no. That’s where I was going with it, is that, it seems as though that’s the entry point but it just broadens out from there. And there is all kinds of money after just the retail side of the business.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:13:49] Yes. And there is also the companies that doing special type of software, companies doing finance technologies, and these guys are way beyond your imagination.

Ed Mysogland: [00:14:05] Well, circling back to the retail, I’ve always wanted to know how they make money. I mean, I know we’ve been focusing on, “Look, we’re taking damaged phones and we’re reselling them.” So, that’s a little bit of a profit center. But it would appear that the real profit is the guy that’s buying it, not necessarily the guy that’s selling the damaged phones. So, they’re getting a little bit of a hit, but it’s downstream that they’re making all the money. So, when I look at the retail operation, where are my profit centers? I know probably, you know, cases and things like that. But where else? Where am I looking at?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:14:57] When you go and you pay your bill, the monthly bill, this is profit. You get a margin. You get a small percentage. But by the time you will have more people coming to your store and doing the payments, that can pay your rent. For example, it can be, like, $2,000 or 3,000. When you are doing the repairs, you charge at least $50 up to $100 per device, so that is another thing. The accessories is another thing. In the accessories, usually you can make up to ten times your cost. So, you buy a charger for $2 and you sell it for $20. You bought this for $5 and you sell it for $25.

Ed Mysogland: [00:15:50] Yeah. Okay. So, the locations, the ones that I see, like when I’m looking at these locations here in Indianapolis, it seems as though – I don’t want to say they’re in the lower income, but it does appear that there’s a concentration in some of our lower income communities. I mean, conversely, where you would see like a Verizon not necessarily down in those same areas. Is that true or not?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:16:26] Yes. Yes. Usually, the lower income areas where you make most of the money. And it’s funny that you mentioned Indiana, because Indiana is very close to my heart. I started my career in Indiana. I consider Indiana as my school to understand the cell phone industry. And every city will have this one store that everybody likes to go there. And you had one, I guess, in the east side of Indy, and the store was amazing. Generation after generation, this is the spot. Everybody wants to go there. It’s not the nicest part of the town, but you know what? Everybody just go there.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:09] Great service. I know what you’re talking about.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:17:11] But when it comes to the stores owned by the carriers, they usually go for the nicer areas. They usually go for prime locations. And the individuals do not like to open next to them because you cannot compete with the carrier. The carrier can hire the best executives, nicest looking sales people, the best devices. It’s not going to affect them. But if you’re an individual business owner, you cannot compete. You cannot compete. You want to be integrating with that company.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:50] Well, that was where I was heading next. How does a company like this compete when you’re looking at online, you’re looking at BestBuy, you’re looking at where else can you activate —

Tamer Shoukry: [00:18:03] Amazon.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:04] Yeah. And some of the bigger box stores. So, how does the mom and pop shop compete against something like that?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:18:12] I’m going to tell you a fact. It’s funny, when you go to one of the big boxes, you don’t get the service. You can grab the device, but no one is going to talk to you about it. No one is going to want to explain the plan. No one is going to tell you this is the most suitable plan for you. And if you have a problem, guess what? Nobody’s going to be able to answer your question. This is why they go to the repair shop to do the activation, to ask questions, and fix problems. And the same thing goes for the bigger carriers, they don’t have this technicality to sort issues with the device itself.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:55] Yeah. I follow that. And I think one of the biggest challenges that I see, and we’ve tinkered around with a couple of them, has to do with repair. And I know you alluded to this just a minute ago that there’s a lot of profit baked into the repairs. And I have some children that have broken, you know, phones and iPads and so on and so forth, so I am well aware of the cost to repair it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:31] But one of the things that we continue to see is the difficulty in finding and then retaining help, especially with that. I think you can be easily trained on selling and understanding the product and the needs of the consumer. But a technician, that’s a different animal. So, how do I find them? How do I retain them?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:20:03] When it comes to technicians, this is the rarest type of employee you can ever — it’s very hard.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:13] No, I’m with you.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:20:14] And usually, if I’m new in town, I don’t know everybody in town already, I would go to Google them and they said phone repair. And these guys, they would spend a lot of money just advertising online. So, when it comes to Google Maps, MapQuest or whatever, it will show you he’s there. He’s there. There is no single town, big town in the whole country without two, three, five stores doing repairs now. When I started my first store, I was the only one in my whole town in Dublin and Hilliard area. So, now it’s different — very well.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:59] Yeah. And now what? You’ve got the major repair repair franchises. What, Cell Phone Repair? And I think there’s two or three others.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:21:09] CPR.

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:10] Yeah. CPR.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:21:12] Yeah. It’s funny, because these guys, they are not franchised really. It’s something – I don’t know how to explain it. The company used to be a franchise. CPR used to be a franchise. And then, they went to every individual store and they convinced them to change their sign and become under them. So, it’s Mike Repair, and everybody likes Mike. They will come to you and tell you, “Come join us. You will have certain kinds of benefits.”

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:44] I get it.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:21:46] I know the guy who started the CPR. He’s a friend of mine, I can say that. But when the company got sold a couple of times, now corporate is really separated from the store owners. It become a full franchise, really, you know.

Ed Mysogland: [00:22:08] Yeah. No, no, I get it. But circling back to the retention of the technician, I mean, is that just an economic thing or is there any other way to induce that type of person to stay with the company? Because if I’m looking at it as a buyer, I’m sitting here going, “All right. I got to figure out how I’m going to keep this guy.” Because what you just said is that the other shops are looking for a repair guy. And my guy probably has a target on his back. You know what I mean?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:22:39] True. This is a very important point, and from my experience, the best thing is to be generous to your technician. And, you know, you always have to have two or three of them. You can’t just depend on one.

Ed Mysogland: [00:22:55] That’s true.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:22:56] Once you have one technician, you hire somebody to be trained under him. Just in case something happened, he got sick, he had to travel, he got married, he got divorced, whatever, you always have a backup. You always have a backup. Somebody will get in and finish all the repairs. When I had my store, I had three. I had three all the time. Because if somebody got sick, we get heavy loads of repairs coming in, I always have enough people to do the repairs.

Ed Mysogland: [00:23:29] I get you. So, moving to financials, so are there various metrics or benchmarks that I could say, you know, if I have a 10 percent net profit margin, I’m doing great. If I have a 50 percent gross profit margin, I’m doing great. Are there any, like, ways to quickly look at a business and say, “Yeah. You know what? That’s a good target for me.”

Tamer Shoukry: [00:23:58] I would usually go and see how many repairs they do per month. I would see how many phones they sell per month. From my side, from my experience, I prefer the stores that sells more devices than the stores that repair more devices, because the biggest goal for you is to have the biggest sales. You need to sell more devices. So, it’s okay, you can do repairs, but you cannot focus on repairs only and neglect selling.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:24:33] So, I would like always to go to the store that’s selling the most devices in the whole area. You sell 100, I know exactly how much money you’re making. Because I would know he would at least make $50 to 100. So, if you sell 100, that’s $5,000. You sell more, you make more money. The rent shouldn’t be more than $2,000 under any circumstances. Some guys, they will go with more, but it will be always a big risk.

Ed Mysogland: [00:25:07] I get it. So, I guess as it relates financially, most people need their cell phone, so my question originally was centered around, you know, is the industry correlated to disposable income. And I think just from our conversation thus far, I can tell that’s probably not the case. There is no correlation to any part of the economy because people are going to need some means to communicate. Right?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:25:49] — percent true. And nowadays, with a device costing you up to $2,000, it’s not only people who do not have money, they go and fix the phones. I had a lawyer used to damage his small tablet all the time and come and spend $300 because all the documents that he has on these tablets.

Ed Mysogland: [00:26:13] Oh, sure, sure.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:26:14] Every time, every day he can buy brand new. But with the documents he has there, it’s worth his life. His career is only in this small device. He will come and spend $300 to fix it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:26:29] Sure. So, one of the challenges that I continue to see is this business as well as a business that is dealing with repairs as well as retail of new, and that’s inventory management. I got to imagine that it is a real challenge in this industry, isn’t it, to keep track of your inventory? Or is there like a universal point of sale type inventory management service or no?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:27:06] There are. There are. It would work for smaller shops. And there is software for wholesalers. But from the bottom of my mind, there is no real solution until today. I’m not saying this to bash the companies that designed those software, but you can do better than this. It can be more in details than what we have now. You can use QuickBooks like any other business. But when it comes to tracking your inventory, there is some software being used now, but I am not satisfied with the results.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:49] No, no, I get it. So, who buys these things? Because I know you’ve sold a lot of them and I’m just kind of curious to know what does that person look like or does it vary?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:28:04] It varies. You can be a mom. You can be a dad. You can be a teacher. You can be a — you can be a government agency. You can be individual who is sending these devices, selling overseas. So, everybody is — but who’s buying more? You can ask me who is the most who’s bought more?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:28:27] And I would answer the question honestly. If you have any market with lots of immigrants, they would buy these devices more than anybody else, because the relatives back home in their countries, they’re going to ask them, we need devices, we need iPhones, we need Samsung, we need this, we need this. And there is no place in the whole Earth is cheaper than the U.S. when it comes to devices. So, the demand is crazy high.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:59] I get it. That’s interesting. I mean, market multiples, do they vary in the industry or they stay fairly consistent? Because I got to imagine the risk remains the same, so I would assume the multiples fairly consistent or no.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:29:24] I would say it’s different between cities. Because if you’re new, it’s not the same thing. If you are in Kansas or Arkansas, you have less people, so your ability to sell devices is less than if you are in a bigger city.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:46] So, multiples increase based on the density of the population in the area.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:29:55] Of course. Of course.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:55] I get it. No, I mean that makes sense. So, as we talk about selling these things, is it a normal lending environment? I mean, it’s just based on cash flow and it works? Or is there a special way that these things get financed given the inventory fluctuations and such? I would assume it’s just like any other business. If it can support the cash flow, you know, you’re in business. Or is that not the case?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:30:31] Well, I would say, the biggest chunk of the business done cash upfront. And I was involved in one of those companies that provides a tool for financing for the independent store owners. So, the software will go and check the background of the person who’s buying the device. It will give you colors: red, don’t give him the device — it’s up to you; and green, go ahead and you can sell him, you can trust him, he has a good credit background, and he has the ability financially to give you the payment every week, $50, $20, whatever you agree on.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:31:17] But I would say cash is the biggest chunk of what’s happening here. Everybody just go and pay upfront. The financing comes from the bigger companies. If you go and buy from Apple, that’s brand new, expensive devices. They have their own financing and they make it easy.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:37] Okay. But as far as buying the company, is it just like any other SBA lender? You know what I mean? From that standpoint, it seems that this is just based on cash flow. I would assume based on what we’re talking about, I would imagine my cash flow to revenue ratio has to be 20, 25 percent. That’s two-and-a-half, three multiple, which then takes me, as I look at it, to a bank. I mean, that’s plenty of cash flow to support some reasonable debt. What I’m trying to establish is the risk associated with, if I’m a lender, where is my risk in loaning that money, aside from the borrower him or herself? You know what I mean?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:32:40] I’ll tell you something, when it comes to small businesses, like individual stores, I never got any lender involved, just usually cash. But talking about bigger companies, the multiple million dollars, then it’s a totally different story. It’s a totally different story.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:00] But if I come in some of the lower income areas, you had already indicated that the buyer pool tends to be —

Tamer Shoukry: [00:33:17] Competition.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:18] Yeah. So, there is consolidation, so they understand it. But as individual buyers, so seller financing – because I’m sitting here, let’s just say it’s $200,000, would you risk 200,000 to buy this business that a lot of which is cash? You know what I mean? It’s almost like a food and beverage business. And to me, this seems harder to track my cash or no?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:34:00] True. This is why I mentioned that most of the buyers will be people from the industry itself. He can be somebody from outside the certain city or town. It can be the guy next door who always wanted to eliminate the competition. He would say, “Okay. I’ll buy it. I’ll take this place.” And usually it goes cash. They pay everything cash. If they have terms that’s between the buyer and seller, I do not recommend that at all because the consequences might escalate to a —

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:39] No, that’s great advice. Like I said, I didn’t anticipate that coming out of your mouth, but it totally makes sense. So, since we’re bumping up on time, the last question I asked every single guest, and you being the expert in the industry, what’s the one piece of advice that you would give, I guess, business owners in the wireless retail or the wireless industry? What piece of advice would you give them that would have the greatest impact on their value and their ability to sell?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:35:15] Do not buy a business based on your emotions. Never. You have to always —

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:21] Okay. So, that’s the buyer.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:35:24] Yes.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:25] So, what about the seller? How is the seller? What does the seller need to do in order to make this business saleable?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:35:33] Your business has more value than what you think. Your business has more value than you think.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:43] So, how do I get that out? Because I’m certain there are plenty of sellers that just heard that and say, “Tell me more. How do I get more money out of my business?”

Tamer Shoukry: [00:35:55] Hire a broker, like me. And I will go to your finances and I will make sure to represent your business in a better way than if you try to represent by yourself, based on numbers, facts.

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:14] Yeah. Yeah. I got it. So, the quality of your financial statements, even though you’ve got a bunch of cash that is flowing in and out of the business, that will determine whether or not you’re going to be able to sell at a premium value.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:36:32] Yes.

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:32] Perfect. So, Tamer, what’s the best way we can connect with you and how can people find you?

Tamer Shoukry: [00:36:38] You can search my name on Google or you can find me on Facebook at Tamer Shoukry. You can find me on Instagram, @cellphonesinbulk. Or you can call me at 614-226-2723.

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:56] Okay. Well, Tamer, I got to tell you, I didn’t know what to expect out of this. I’ve always seen it. I’ve always heard that the business was lucrative. I just had no idea that there was so much more to it than just a storefront. So, thanks for the education. I’m certain everybody’s kind of in the same camp with me of like, “Wow. What a crazy business. And, boy, that might be a nice little business for me to buy.” So, thanks for coming on and telling us all about that.

Tamer Shoukry: [00:37:33] You’re welcome. And thank you so much for inviting me.

Outro: [00:37:36] Thank you for joining us today on the How to Sell Your Business Podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

Tagged With: business broker, Business Owners, cellphone repair, cellphones, Ed Mysogland, entreprenuers, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, Mr. Wireless, pricing, selling a business, Tamer Shoukry, valuation, value, Wireless Dealerz, wireless phones, wireless reseller

How to Ensure a Deal is Compliant, with Scott Oliver, Lewis Kappes

February 21, 2023 by John Ray

Scott Oliver
How to Sell a Business
How to Ensure a Deal is Compliant, with Scott Oliver, Lewis Kappes
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Scott Oliver

How to Ensure a Deal is Compliant, with Scott Oliver, Lewis Kappes  (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 12)

On this episode of How To Sell a Business Podcast, Scott Oliver, Director at Lewis Kappes, joined host Ed Mysogland to talk about how to make sure a deal is compliant. They covered the process of reviewing proposed deals and preparing them for SBA compliance, the importance of using a seasoned SBA legal counsel, factors that can create problems, how to best work with SBA counsel, standby notes, and more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

Lewis Kappes

Headquartered in downtown Indianapolis, Lewis Kappes offers the depth and experience you would expect from a large law firm, with the responsiveness and attention you would receive from a small firm.

They take a team approach to help you achieve your goals. This allows them to adapt to developments and react quickly and efficiently to pressing matters, while placing the diverse experience and expertise of the entire firm at your disposal.

Lewis Kappes is a proud member of the Law Firm Alliance (LFA).

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter

Scott Oliver, Director, Lewis Kappes

Scott Oliver, Director, Lewis Kappes

Scott Oliver practices in the areas of commercial finance, real estate, and corporate transactions. He represents state and national banks involved in commercial financing, as well as clients involved in business/real estate transactions, including: real estate acquisitions/sales, business acquisitions/sales, leases, entity formation and governance, commercial issues, contract preparation, contract negotiations, and compliance.

As a closing attorney, Scott represents banks and non-bank lenders involved in SBA and conventional financing. He works in all stages of the lending process, including credit review, compliance, eligibility, lien perfection, title review/negotiations, preparation of security instruments/loan documents, subordination/intercreditor agreements, workouts, collections, foreclosure, and bankruptcy. Over the course of his career, Scott has closed hundreds of SBA 7(a) loans, SBA 504 loans, SBA CAPLine loans, and a wide range of conventional facilities. While stationed in the heart of Indianapolis, his team has closed transactions throughout the country in all 50 states.

Through his corporate practice, Scott represents a variety of businesses, from closely held corporations to multi-million dollar entities. He advises clients in transactions involving real estate matters, acquisitions, sales, partner buyouts, and general commercial contracts and disputes. His representation also involves guiding new and emerging companies through entity selection, formation, growth, and governance.

Outside of his traditional practice areas, Scott is an Adjunct Professor at the Indiana University Robert H. McKinney School of Law, teaching Legal Communication and Analysis. He is an active member of the Indianapolis Bar Association where he holds various leadership positions and manages small and large-scale events for the local community.

Scott earned his B.A. from Purdue University, where he graduated with highest distinction and served as the graduation commencement speaker. He earned his J.D., cum laude, from the Indiana University Robert H. McKinney School of Law. During law school, Scott was the President of the Student Bar Association, a member of the Moot Court Executive Board, Vice Magister of Phi Delta Phi, a legal research and writing tutor, and a student teacher at Shortridge High School in Indianapolis, Indiana.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business podcast where every week we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:36] On today’s podcast, I had the opportunity to visit with Scott Oliver. And if you’ve ever wondered who is in the deal beyond buy side, sell side, who’s the bank’s counsel? This is that guy. So any SBA loan has a attorney that’s looking out for the bank’s interest. And I thought it would be prudent for buyers and sellers to understand somebody that deals with how to make sure that your deal is compliant.

And Scott Oliver, he is everywhere. If you’re on LinkedIn, he writes all the time on it. He is a partner at Lewis Kappes and just one of those generous guys of information. And I can tell you that having met him now and talking about deals, he is the real deal as it relates to this segment of the SBA process. So I hope you enjoy my conversation with Scott Oliver.

I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. On this podcast, I interview buyers, sellers, advisors and all kinds of other people about what creates value in a business and how they take that information and make that business more valuable and ultimately be able to sell for a premium value. On today’s show, I’ve been looking forward to this interview for a couple of months now. It’s Scott Oliver of Lewis Kappes. So welcome, Scott.

Scott Oliver: [00:02:18] Hey. Thanks for having me on. I’m looking forward to it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:20] So in my introduction, I kind of gave a little bit of an overview of you, but and I guess like we were talking in the pre-show, I wanted you to talk about all the things that go on behind the scenes that most sellers and buyers don’t understand. So can you talk a little bit about your practice and how you’re doing that?

Scott Oliver: [00:02:44] Yeah, So I’ve been in SBA for about a decade. As you said, I work at Lewis Kappes. I’m a partner here now, and we really like to call it a lean, mean, oiled machine of getting deals done. So we have a good bench of attorneys and dedicated paralegals who are solely closing deals for SBA lenders in all 50 states. So all across the country. And while we’re doing that, there’s really systems in place to get those deals done. Some of the clients are having us interact directly with the buyers and sellers, while others have specific tasks that they want us to do that doesn’t involve any communication with the buyer or seller.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:23] So what do you think your practice is made up between represented deals? My understanding is that there’s about a I don’t know, 10 percent come from represented deals like meaning from deal guys, M&A brokers, so on and so forth. I mean what is that what you see or no?

Scott Oliver: [00:03:43] Yeah, that’s pretty common. Normally, if there’s a broker involved, sometimes the brokers are fantastic. Other times, they can be a bit of a pain to deal with. But the big one that we see differences in are deals that are either representative of people who have counsel for the buyer or counsel for the borrower. And honestly, I’d say it’s probably 60-40. Sixty percent will have counsel, forty percent won’t. And depending on which attorney is involved, those deals can be walks in the park. As long as everybody’s communicating and being a real deal team with the same goals in mind of getting the deal done quickly organized, and also in compliance with the SBA regs, which is what I’m really looking at on my client side.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:29] So how did you find — out all the different services that an attorney can provide, how did you find SBA work? I mean, yeah, I guess that’s what I’m asking is just how did you — I mean, because it is really a niche. There’s not a whole lot of people doing it right or am I wrong?

Scott Oliver: [00:04:47] There’s not a ton. I mean, there’s only a handful of law firms in the United States that have a fully dedicated team that closes SBA deals. Some people will dabble in it, and those people are more or less successful in that. But from my front, I initially went to law school thinking that I wanted to be a litigator. I like to talk. Everybody says that I like to argue and things like that. But I realized very, very quickly that that really wasn’t first off, what I was good at or to what filled my cup, what I was interested in.

So I started exploring options where I could put my knowledge of business, finance, communication skills and things like that to the test. In a way that’s the happy side of law, helping people get something done. So my second year of law school, I ended up getting one of those coveted summer associate positions at Lewis Kappes. I’ve been here my entire career. And during that time, I met with a couple of the partners who said, hey, I see what you’re interested in. Do you like business? You’re good at this sort of thing. Why don’t you try SBA?

And at that time, I said, like Student Bar Association. Oh, I’m in the Student Bar Association. Yeah, I’m good at that. And they said, no, no, no, Small Business Administration. Right? And so, they handed me files that were closed and said, look at these. Take a look, see what you think, read about the credit memos and then come back and talk with us and see if this is something you’re interested in doing. So I did that. And honestly, it sounds super cliche, I fell in love with the practice area, mainly because you were seeing deal after deal after deal of these entrepreneurs that have these goals and you’re figuring out how the deal structures are put together and what these entrepreneurs are doing to either start or scale their business. Fascinating.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:32] Yeah. Well, and you just gave me about four other questions I didn’t think about, but can you start with your process? So a deal comes, it’s an SBA candidate. The SBA lender, I’m assuming, makes their pitch. Here is the letter, the credit letter, basically their letter of intent. And then I’m assuming that’s when you get involved or do you get involved prior to that? So can you take me from start to finish.

Scott Oliver: [00:07:09] Yeah. So most of our clients are institutional clients. So we’re basically the partner in their pocket where they can bounce ideas off of us at any sort of point. But a deal comes into our office when there is a signed commitment letter and a signed credit memorandum. So we’ll usually get a deal from one of the banks and we’ll look at it and we’ll say, okay, here are the basic terms. And then in that credit memo, that’s usually 50 plus pages, that is the deal. And the nice little packet is what we start with.

I personally prepare what we actually dubbed here at the office as a DLP. It stands for Digital Legal Pad. We can go down that rabbit hole if you’d like, but it was during COVID. I put together this basically a smart form checklist of any deal type that you could possibly imagine. And when we get those two documents in, we take that master version, and we’ll chop it down. And it will literally tell you everything that your buyer needs or the borrower in this instance needs to do in order to comply with the SBA standard operating procedure. So SOP 5010 sticks. And then it tracks communications with that bank with that closer throughout the life of the deal. So we can cut out some of the gut of the email correspondence and say, here’s what we’ve done, here’s what we need to do and here’s where we’re at when we’re getting ready to sit down at the closing table and close this thing out.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:28] So, okay. So the smart pad, I mean what was the vehicle that — I’ve never heard of the smart pad. I mean, was it a Google doc? What does that mean?

Scott Oliver: [00:08:42] The way you’re putting it makes it sound more impressive than it is. So it’s a document that I put together actually when COVID hit, because we still have a big physical presence in Indianapolis in One American. Whenever a deal would come in, we’d have these big, they call them bankers files, tab documents where we print every single document, every operating agreement, franchise agreement and all that. And we put them in there and then we have this big box basically for every single deal.

COVID happened. And it’s almost comical, like lugging in like briefcases and backpacks, all these things, saying two weeks to flatten the curve, I’m going to have all my stuff at home. We’re going to take care of this. Well, two weeks, as you guys know, did not turn into two weeks. And at that point, I couldn’t do the physical paper anymore. It was getting so cumbersome, and deals were starting to pile up. And I was saying, this doesn’t work. So I got a Microsoft Word template out and essentially plug and play every single requirement and made a master version that takes, you know, if I had 100 deals on my desk, it condenses that so that I can send this document to any of my associates, any of my paralegals, they can look at it and know exactly what needs to be done for the client, electronically.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:55] Nice. I mean, and similarly, in our shop, I mean same thing. I mean, the COVID hit, and we needed a means to effectively communicate on how we were going to continue to do deals. So that’s yeah, that’s fascinating. So what what version of SOPs are we on? We’re on G?

Scott Oliver: [00:10:23] SOP 50 10 6.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:25] And they’re like an A, B, C, D, E, F?

Scott Oliver: [00:10:31] H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P. Let me see. I can’t recall what number it is, but it’s the one that came out in a couple of years back. And they’re saying that another version will be coming out, supposed to be in November, but it’s still anticipated in Q1 of this year.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:44] So it’s funny that like in USPAP. So Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice, I know you know what that means, but for our listeners, in their documentation, they have guidance, different types of situations where this is how you should handle that. And I’m just wondering, with all the deals, I mean do they defer to you for interpretation of the SOP or is there someone that has authored the SOP that can give you guidance when you’re stuck?

Scott Oliver: [00:11:18] Most of the time, they’re deferring to legal counsel if they have legal counsel to interpret the SOP. That’s why it’s so important for when you hire counsel to hire counsel that doesn’t just dabble in it. If you haven’t seen multiple, multiple, multiple deals over a period of time, been in the space over a period of time, you don’t know how the SBA has interpreted things in the past. You haven’t seen how deals shake out in the event of default and all of that. So legal counsel, we’re usually asked, hey, what does the SOP say about this or how do we handle this?

But the SOP, at least 50 10 6, is going to be your eligibility guideline. So it’s almost like that baseline of what lenders must follow. Throughout that document, you’ll see prudent used a lot because the SOP provides these regs. But at the end of the day, the lender also has to be prudent, and the prudent lending standard is gray. Lawyers like gray because it requires to interpret but then the bank has to make these decisions, which are sometimes business decisions. And we’ll see a lot of banks get caught up and they’ll say, oh, well, we have this firm. And they said, no, we can’t do this no matter what. Draw a line in the sand where in many instances, depending on the deal, that’s not the answer. It’s here’s what the SOP says. You have to have an eligible deal. Of course. Here’s what the borrower is asking. Here’s the type of deal. Here’s the collateral. Here are your risks. Now, Bank, how do you want to proceed given this information?

Ed Mysogland: [00:12:50] When you say the bank, who at the bank is making that decision?

Scott Oliver: [00:12:56] So when we’re working with people, it’s usually a closer that’s on the other side. Most banks have closers. They’re the ones that are kind of on the ground level working with counsel. But if it comes to a business decision like that, that really requires additional input, you’re looking at the senior credit underwriter, you’re looking at bank management and depending on their, I guess, hierarchical structure, who is actually making a business/risk assessment based on counsel’s recommendation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:22] When the package gets to you, so they’ve already — has due diligence concluded or is it in process or where are they at in the spectrum of the deal?

Scott Oliver: [00:13:38] Usually, it has the due diligence, legal due diligence. Is that what you’re referring to?

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:42] Yep.

Scott Oliver: [00:13:42] Usually, they don’t have that in.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:44] Legal — I’m sorry, accounting, regular accounting due diligence.

Scott Oliver: [00:13:49] Your underwriting is usually complete. So they have a credit memorandum. They’ve taken a look and said, okay, this collateral is available, here’s what we have to take. Here’s what we might take, depending on the specifics of the deal. All of that is usually taken care of. Unless there’s a trailing requirement. And as you know, through your work, deals change, circumstances change. Maybe I get a document in, and I say this is ineligible. We can’t do this. That requires a restructure of the deal. That can happen. And if it does, they’ll document their file with a change memo or they’ll have to get an update signed commitment letter from the client, what have you. So it’s an everevolving process throughout.

Ed Mysogland: [00:14:29] I get it. So does the — we keep on seeing all this stuff about like quality of earnings and things like that. So when credit — and again, I guess it is a business decision, but does your work, is it ever influenced by the, I suppose, the comprehensiveness or like let’s just say, you know, a credit — this comes from you get a deal and it has a quality of earnings report. It has all of maybe audited financial statements. I get that it is a business decision, but does that necessarily influence you at all based on the risk associated with the deal? Or is it just total — you know, this I’m doing compliance work and if you guys like the quality of earnings because it makes you happy, then have at it. Is that it?

Scott Oliver: [00:15:20] Yeah, that’s usually separated. And so what I like to tell my associates that are coming up through SBA too is we always have to remember which hat we’re wearing. That’s to protect and to benefit our firm, of course, but it’s also to protect the bank. We can’t be getting involved in the bank’s policies and procedures and underwriting credit box, things like that. If we get a deal in and credit says that it is good, we’re not looking at financials, we’re not looking at things like that. But if we get something across our desk and it violates the SOP, we’re required to point that out or we see an issue in a purchase agreement or resolutions, title work, searches. All of the different things that we do through our scope of services, we’re partnering with the bank and pointing those types of things out.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:06] I got it. So but at the same time, if you see a structure that doesn’t comply and I’m trying to think of a situation where it doesn’t comply, and you just flag it. And now, it becomes either you have to change the deal in order for compliance purposes. And you’ve got an example of a situation where here’s the deal structure and yeah, this isn’t going to work. And by the way, I guess the bigger question is why wouldn’t the lender know the rule, you know?

Scott Oliver: [00:16:43] And most of the time, we’re not going to get a deal in where there is a glaring issue, especially if we’re working with some of our more experienced lenders in that space. They have goalposts. They have certain aspects within their underwriting process where they’re going to catch most of that. But at the same time, you might get a deal and the deal is approved with one borrower, let’s say. And the borrower isn’t formed yet. It’s an entity to be formed. I call that an ETBF on my DLP. There’s a lot of acronyms, right?

So let’s say that it’s approved in that manner. The borrower then gets an attorney, and the attorney is a brilliant tax attorney/corporate attorney. And they say, well, for such and such reasons, we actually want you to form a real estate holding company to buy the real estate, and we want you to form an operating company to run the business. And the borrower says, all right, lawyer, you said this, I trust you. I want to proceed in this fashion.

Well, that’s not what was approved with the bank. That doesn’t kill the deal, but they have to go to the bank and say, look, my lawyer said I need to have two entities, one for the real estate and one for the operating company. At that point, I would be getting involved because what that’s called is an EPC/OC transaction, eligible passive company/operating company transaction. That triggers some very, very strict requirements from the SBA. So we’d have to structure it that way.

And I’d be talking with the underwriter saying, look, we have to have this eligible passive company. This eligible passive company has to lease 100 percent of the real estate that it purchases to the eligible operating company. We have to have requirements in the SOP with the lease, the rent payments and things like that. And we need to make sure that when we get to the closing table, that eligible passive company is not receiving the working capital because you’d have a guarantee, at least a repair, probably a denial in that situation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:41] I get it. So I was wondering, because I had never heard of the term eligible passive company rule. And we’ve done lots, lots of SBA deals where there’s an operating entity and a real estate entity. So I’ll be a lot more eloquent these days on that. So are there other provisions that you see that are so underutilized that you just kind of shake your head on, if you only knew about this, you would run toward it and say, yeah, this really works pretty well.

Scott Oliver: [00:19:21] From a buyer perspective?

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:22] Yeah. Buyer or seller. Yeah, let’s go buyer.

Scott Oliver: [00:19:26] So I think most of the time that what we see with buyers or buyers counsel is not that they structure it in a way that’s not advantageous to the buyer, it’s that they are drafting documents and they don’t have an understanding of what is required by the SBA. And if they were to either have that understanding initially or consult with somebody who does know the SBA, whether that’s the lender or another attorney, they could draft documents that are compliant at the outset or at least have an understanding of what those need to look like so that they can start talking with, let’s say, the seller. Or another good example is talking with the landlord, right? Talking with the landlord early and saying this is the type of business we have. Here are the lenders requirements. Here’s what the SOP says. And by the way, we need this landlord waiver signed and doing that early. I see so many deals where counsel is involved for a month and then they just start talking about the purchase agreement and the landlord waiver a week before they want to close. Doesn’t work.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:26] No. And again, it’s a reflection. I know in situations where where we’ve dragged our feet, it’s, all right, this deal is teetering. And it’s funny, it’s either it happens to either be at the quarter where financials are going to come out or it’s going to be at the year, and everybody wants to see that. So I get it. So I wanted to ask about do you guys ever make concessions? Do you see banks ever make concessions on risk? Because I’m sitting here going, all right, most banks, so they’re going to get 75 percent guarantee. They have, I don’t want to say little exposure, but certainly they don’t want it to default. But at the same time, they want that loan. But do they ever make any kind of concessions or it’s like, yeah, you know what, we’ll wait for the next one?

Scott Oliver: [00:21:27] Yeah, I don’t deal in absolute. So I could never say no, they will never make a concession, right. And that’s not my place to say for those banks in those instances. But at the same time, a bank is not going to waive something that jeopardizes its guarantee. So there are aspects of any sort of deal where the SOP or the SBA has came in and said, if you do this or if you do not do this, you are either looking at a repair or you’re flat out denied for your SBA guarantee. Those types of things, I mean, I personally never seen a bank give in on that, but there are other things that also from our perspective, recommendation wise, they shouldn’t give in to, but they might make some concessions just depending on the specifics of the deal.

So you and I were talking a little bit offline, just kind of shooting the breeze about different deal structures. But one example that I’ve seen before is when you have a situation with, let’s say there’s a borrower and they just have a little satellite office, right? So homebased businesses are becoming more common. And let’s say everything about the deal is approved, but we find out, hey, they rent space two days a week out of One American. Complete example. And they go there and there is a computer. They sit down and they just want to get away. And we look at it and the requirement is that you need to have a lease for the term of the loan.

Ed Mysogland: [00:22:49] I get it.

Scott Oliver: [00:22:50] And if that happens, the borrower might say, well, that’s not working. We have a we work agreement and I can’t get that. The lender will tell them it should be, the lease should be the term of the loan. But they might make a business decision and say, okay, given the circumstances, the fact that there’s no collateral other than a 1997 LG computer screen right on a desk that they don’t own, we’re okay making this concession here and we’ll close the deal without requiring you to have a ten-year lease.

Ed Mysogland: [00:23:19] Yeah, I can see that one. So I guess where I wanted to head next is where are the, or better yet, who are the biggest hassles that you face? Because I mean certainly, well, yeah, who are the who? We’ll start there. Who gives you the greatest amount of heartburn and deals?

Scott Oliver: [00:23:47] Normally, you’re going to see landlords are hard to deal with, but I think the the more direct answer to that is if we have buyer or sellers counsel who is operating outside of their wheelhouse. And I’m not putting down any attorneys, but if we get a deal in and it is a let’s say a $4.5 million business acquisition, so it’s an M&A transaction and buyer either hires a criminal law attorney or a family law attorney that’s never seen an M&A transaction in his or her life, that will be very difficult to have a smooth transaction there because they just haven’t experienced. It’d be like asking me to represent somebody in a DUI case. You would never do that because that doesn’t make sense for me. That’s one side of that coin.

The other side is actually probably what you wouldn’t think. It’s when we get a deal and they have insert law firm’s name where the law firm and the attorneys are used to doing $100 million, $200 million, $1 billion deals and maybe it’s your buddy. And they said, we’ll take this case, and we’ll not charge you $1500 an hour. We’ll take it, but we’re really, really experienced, sophisticated attorneys. And the reason those deals will sometimes have more headaches is because they treat it like a billion-dollar transaction when it’s a $4.5 million transaction.

At that point, you’re arguing for the sake of arguing, they’re not understanding how SMB, small to medium sized business, transactions operate. And those can end up being really, really difficult. Mixing the egos with some of those folks that can be very, very hard. So you have to hire somebody who is right for the job, somebody who knows lower to middle market types of deals and preferably somebody who knows those deals and also knows SBA lending. If you have that, I mean that’s a walk in the park. And we’ll close those deals all day every day.

Ed Mysogland: [00:25:43] Well, I’ll tell you, and we face that same hurdle. I mean, we had a deal and it was half that. And at the end of this thing, they had $100,000 plus legal fee, and they’re total sticker shock. And it was like how in the world did you not think that this was going to happen? You saw the marquee, you’ve been to the office, you knew what you were getting into. But anyway, it is what it is.

So along the hassle factor, I was curious to know from the preferred lenders versus the homegrown banks, I mean is there any difference? Or I suppose volume probably helps, but I’m just curious to know whether or not, I know from our standpoint, when we’re battling somebody, like you said that doesn’t do a whole lot of SBA work, it really elongates the process. It becomes substantially more complicated than it necessarily needs to be. So do you find the same or no?

Scott Oliver: [00:26:53] Well, we deal with both, PLP lenders, preferred lenders, and then also GP lenders. Both of them, you will find quality banks and non-bank lenders on both sides. All that means is that when you have a PLP lender, they have a lot more flexibility in decisions that they can make on their own without having to ask the SBA or get approval from the SBA. So that does result usually in a much quicker closing timeline. It will sometimes result in better certainty to close, which is usually a big, big, big want from borrowers.

And generally, those are the ones that have met certain guideposts throughout the process. They’ve closed a certain number of deals. They’ve done certain things. They’ve met quality standards. So that’s usually what you see with PLP lenders. But GP lenders are usually in the plight to obtain their PLP license. So I’ve seen, in my opinion, some of the best banks have started as GP. They’ve worked their way through it, they’ve obtained their license and then it’s game on and they’re crushing it. So I wouldn’t look to that necessarily from a borrower’s perspective but it’s a factor to consider.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:06] You know, one of the things about SBA lending and you used to hear a lot of the default rates, I don’t think that there’s nearly the level of SBA default. Is that an accurate statement or do you guys not track that or ever hear of it?

Scott Oliver: [00:28:22] I don’t look at the default rates as often because I’m more of a closer on the closing side. Our litigation team for creditors rights would probably have those types of statistics, and I’d be interested to know that as well.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:32] Yeah, because to me, I think the whole system is a lot better at using the SBA as a tool to finance as opposed to the Wild West. So I was just curious. So I know we were talking about the SBA coming out with whatever next version is supposedly in November. But I mean, to me, I look at that document and I mean, it’s pretty comprehensive. And you just wonder, what else can you throw in? And I’m not asking you to provide commentary. I guess that is a living document.

And where I’m heading with it is who do you turn to for guidance on it? And I know I touched on it a little earlier, but prudent is one thing, but it’s a whole nother thing that it’s a big document for people that don’t know. I mean, there’s a ton in there. So I guess that was kind of my question is, even the best practitioner has to defer to somebody. Who would that be for you?

Scott Oliver: [00:29:51] Yeah. So we study that document, of course, and it’s a document in and of itself. But then you also have CFRs and various links throughout it that will really give you even deeper detail into what you look at. So if we’re going outside of that document, right, we’re usually looking to being plugged in with trade associations such as NAGGL, some of the other local associations, the SBA directly, other law firms, other lenders and things like that to keep up on the types of trends that are going on and to get clarifications when things come out.

I mean, I mentioned names, but if something comes up and I’m really scratching my head here and I’m thinking, what does the SBA think? Well, I’ll call somebody and say, hey, have you seen this before? What do you take away from this? So that’s part of it, just developing a knowledge base outside of the document and making sure you’re up to date with procedural notices, too. Have you read the procedural notices that come out from time to time, too?

Ed Mysogland: [00:30:50] Yep. Well, I’ll tell you, one guy and granted, you’re a nationwide guy, but here in Indiana, Eric Armacost. I don’t know if you’d know what a great resource. He has helped us immensely on so many different occasions and he is just, as far as the SBA goes, they are really fortunate to have a guy like him because he is so generous with time as well as the information he’s providing. So brokers differ widely. I mean, I know we talked about the seller’s counsel and landlords being probably the ones that give you the greatest heartburn. But in our profession, how can we better work with folks like you?

Scott Oliver: [00:31:45] With brokers specifically?

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:46] Yeah. I mean, from the standpoint of how can — from a brokerage standpoint, I mean we put — hopefully, we’ll put together a sound deal. We’ll have all the information. All the forms are going together. But from the time you get all the underwriting, your underwriting package and now we’re heading toward closing, is there anything, any tripwires that we can be aware of that you know what, if you were just smart enough to listen to me, this is what will make your deal go a lot smoother. Anything come to mind?

Scott Oliver: [00:32:23] Yeah. So in those situations, if I’m directly dealing with a broker, it’s usually because there’s not another lawyer involved, right? So it’s somebody who — buyer doesn’t have counsel, seller doesn’t have counsel, we’ve got a broker and we’re dealing with them. The best thing that they can do is to communicate effectively with our office. Many times, broker forms, not putting them down, but sometimes broker forms can have some glaring issues that will cause repairs and denials for the banks.

If something like that comes up, and I as counsel reach out to the broker and say, hey, we can’t have this or we need this, this way, and we’re met with absolutely not, we’ve seen this before and we’re never going to do this, that is not the way to approach it. And I will get that sometimes. They’ll say, I’ve closed a thousand transactions and I’ve never had counsel ask me for this. Well, you’re being asked now, and I don’t know which transactions you closed for who, but you probably closed them incorrectly and the bank took a risk. My client needs it this way. And if we can get on the phone or even on email and just walk through it, talk through what it needs to look like, usually it’s done within a matter of five minutes. And snappy, buyer’s happy and the broker looks great and usually I’ll use that broker in the future as well.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:36] You know, the tough part is and again, there is — and I preach that to our younger guys. I mean, there’s a certain role that you play, and everybody wants to get the deal across the finish line. Everybody. There’s no one that’s sitting here trying to dump on your deal. But at the same time, you have to understand that all these people that are loaning you millions of dollars, they have to understand the risk that they’re taking. And it’s not a reflection of you professionally to come back and say, look, we have to do it this way. And again, and if your client doesn’t like it, then he doesn’t like it, and he has options. He can pull the deal and start over. But, oh, by the way, knowing what I know about you, we’re probably going to bump into you again. And the bank is probably going to be in the same position for the same client. So why not just address it now. Go ahead.

Scott Oliver: [00:34:43] Most banks have a similar approach. I mean, there are differences in lenders and you can figure those out on your own. But at the end of the day, if I’m asking a broker or whoever it is for a very specific revision, there’s a reason. And sometimes they’ll get upset and say, well, we’ll pull the deal, we’ll go somewhere else. Well, you go somewhere else, you’re going to have the same issue. Assuming that the lender understands the SOP and understands the transaction.

So we’re never trying to step on anyone’s toes. Like you said, we’re all kind of super cheesy, but we’re in this together and we want to get this done in a way that protects all parties. I’m obviously looking out for the bank, but at the same time, I’m also looking out for a buyer in a way, because that buyer, if something goes wrong, that buyer is not going to be able to repay its note. And then I have a client who has a defaulted loan. I don’t want that. The bank doesn’t want it either.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:37] Sure. And you would think that that would be self-evident. And yeah, we bump into that periodically where the seller has dug their heels in, and this is the way I want it kind of like a kid. I’m not going to change. Well, okay, well, but at the same time, you’re not going to get a deal. It doesn’t work that way. And I know that you think that you have all the leverage. And this is what — you know, we’ve been counseling this for years. The closer you are to completing the deal, the less leverage you have over everybody. And you just need to understand that this is just part of the process. It’s not a reflection of your business. It’s just the way it is, especially when, oh, by the way, somebody is loaning your buyer 80, 90 percent of your purchase price. And you would think that it would resonate. But boy, sometimes it is a real, real challenge. Speaking of 80 or 90 percent, standby notes, that seems to be the vehicle of choice these days to get deals across the line, the seller standby notes.

So I guess what is your opinion — I mean granted this is back to risk. I understand that the bank has to make that decision. But some of the provisions that you have seen, like for example, standby note is great to bridge that equity gap. Totally get it. But where I was heading with it is not only that, but now earnout used to be a lot of the deals we had, especially service businesses. And now they’re in favor of self-canceling notes. I mean, are you — I guess what I’m asking is, are you familiar or have you seen any deal structures where service-related businesses are able to mitigate their risk through some sort of, yeah, I mean, you got the self-canceling notes, you can’t do earnout, but any other vehicles that you’ve seen or no?

Scott Oliver: [00:37:55] I’ve seen some of those unique vehicles in non-full standby seller notes. And usually when there is a seller note that’s not on full standby, meaning it’s not being used as equity injection. The ball is a lot more in the lender’s court because they’re looking at it and they’re saying, okay, how is this going to impact my borrower? What does the bottom line look like here? What types of provisions in here are either compliant or are there any concerns about eligibility in here? There’s more flexibility when it’s not being used in injection.

But the opposite side of that is when it’s being used as injection, there is very little to no wiggle room there. And that is what — you see people talk about this a lot on the Internet and other places, but the full standby note is what it is. If your seller is going to be taking back a note for any amount of money and it’s being used as a full standby seller note, there are no payments. There are no payments of principal and interest during the term of the loan. And there’s a bunch of other provisions in there as well, such as not being able to act on any of the collateral that the seller might be taking that’s securing the note. It is just that a full standby note, no deviation, because then you have equity injection that’s out of whack. And equity injection is a big hot topic with the SBA that cannot be violated in any instance.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:16] Well, one of the things that I guess is a myth is that you can petition the SBA to release principal or interest or both on those standby notes. I have never seen it happen ever, ever, ever. But I think it’s somewhere in the SOP that that you can do that, but I’ve never seen anyone get any kind of payment. You? I saw you shake your head. Yeah.

Scott Oliver: [00:39:47] I have not seen that either because when you have a deal that’s structured and they say, hey, Ed, you’re going to have to inject $500,000 into this deal. And you say, I can’t. Can I take at least $100,000 of my equity from a seller note? And the bank says yes. Well, in that instance, yeah, you’re getting credit for that $100,000 seller note, but that seller is not getting paid until the SBA is paid in full. And that is the whole purpose of that note, that vehicle, because they are strictly subordinate to the SBA. It’s a very bright line approach that they take. So short answer no, I have not seen that on those types of deals.

Ed Mysogland: [00:40:24] I get it. All right. So my last question, I ask of all of my guests, but unfortunately, you’re going to get the three-part one. So the question is, if you had one piece of advice to give our listeners, what would in your case be most valuable in getting a deal done? And so the three parts are what would you tell a buyer, what would you tell a seller, and what would you tell an attorney representing either of them?

Scott Oliver: [00:40:54] I’m going to take the easy way out here and give you one answer for all three.

Ed Mysogland: [00:40:57] All right.

Scott Oliver: [00:40:58] And it is make sure that your deal team is in order or whatever you want to call it. Some people will call it their board of directors. Some people call it their deal team. And what I mean by that is when you are heading into the LOI stage or really any stage in your search, make sure that you’re thinking about who is going to be my counsel on this transaction, who is going to be my lender, who is going to be my broker if there is one, who is going to be my accountant, who is going to be my emotional support, right?

Ed Mysogland: [00:41:29] Sure.

Scott Oliver: [00:41:29] Whether it’s a spouse, a friend or somebody else who’s going to be my mentor, all of this sort of things, if you have those solidified going into it, you will have such an easier time getting that deal to close. And I preach this a lot when I’m talking to buy side counsel or if I’m by side counsel, I’m saying who has experience in what? How is this going to be organized? And how are we getting to the closing table? If you have that in order, you’re sitting pretty on that deal and much more likely to close and much more likely to close without copious amounts of Advil.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:06] I got it. All right. Well, what’s the best way we can connect with you?

Scott Oliver: [00:42:10] Yeah, so I’m really active actually on LinkedIn, which is something that people on Twitter don’t like to hear. But you can find Scott Oliver on LinkedIn. You can find me on Twitter, @SAOliver_Atty or send me an email. My firm is Lewis Kappes and my email address is SOliver@LewisKappes.com. I’m always open to chat, whether it’s SBA, M&A or any of the topics we’ve discussed today. I’m a bit of a nerd, if I must say so.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:39] I don’t think you’re a nerd. I think you’re right in the sandbox I like. So I totally appreciate you and what you do. Everything that we’ve talked about is going to be in the show notes, including where to find you and where. So, Scott, thanks so much for hanging out with me this morning.

Scott Oliver: [00:42:57] Thank you so much, Ed. I appreciate it.

Outro: [00:43:00] Thank you for joining us today on How To Sell Your Business podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

Tagged With: attorney, business brokerage, Business Owners, business value, commercial finance, corporate transactions, Ed Mysogland, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, how to sell your business, Lewis Kappes, Scott Oliver, valuations

How to Maximize Profit as a Car Dealership, with Max Zanan, MZ Dealer Services and Author of the Perfect Dealership Series

February 14, 2023 by John Ray

Max Zanan
How to Sell a Business
How to Maximize Profit as a Car Dealership, with Max Zanan, MZ Dealer Services and Author of the Perfect Dealership Series
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Max Zanan

How to Maximize Profit as a Car Dealership, with Max Zanan, MZ Dealer Services and Author of the Perfect Dealership Series (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 11)

Max Zanan, owner of MZ Dealer Services and author of Perfect Dealership, a four book series dedicated to helping car dealership owners adapt and thrive in their business, joined host Ed Mysogland. They discussed the industry as a whole, how dealers make their money, where the profit actually is, why dealerships are not likely to stay in the owner’s family, the role of the service department, how to keep qualified employees or train them, why buying a car takes so long, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

MZ Dealer Services

Max Zanan is an automotive industry leader offering a comprehensive automotive consulting service for car dealers nationwide. His goal is to improve customer experience and retention while increasing dealership’s profits.

Contact Max today to build a better dealership including automotive compliance, F&I optimization, sales strategy, and more. He welcomes phone calls at  917-903-0312.

Website | Facebook| YouTube

Perfect Dealership Books by Max Zanan

Remember travel agencies? They were a thriving business not so long ago. Then online services transformed the industry, and brick-and-mortar travel agencies died—and died quickly.

Today, traditional car dealerships are facing much the same threat. Innovative and convenient digital startups and services threaten to disrupt the traditional car-sale process, egged on by consumers who aren’t happy with the existing sales process. If car dealerships don’t adapt, they too will face an industry-wide extinction.

Perfect Dealership offers help and hope for dealerships struggling to adapt to this digital-based paradigm shift. Consultant Max Zanan applies fifteen years of automotive-industry experience to the future of the car dealership. Arguing that dealerships must make significant changes if they are to survive the coming storm, Zanan takes a close look at every department within the business, including

    • human resources,
    • business development centers,
    • information technology,
    • parts and service, and
    • finance and insurance.

By improving the role of each department and transforming them from individual echelons into a cohesive whole, Zanan offers a road map for the creation of a perfect dealership—the only way to remain relevant and solvent in the digital age.

Find all of Max’s books here: Perfect Dealership

Max Zanan, Owner, MZ Dealer Services, and Author of the Perfect Dealership Series

Max Zanan, Owner, MZ Dealer Services, and Author of the “Perfect Dealership” Series

Max Zanan is the author of four best-selling books on automotive retail management: Perfect Dealership, Car Business 101, The Art and Science of Running a Car Dealership, and Effective Car Dealer. Each book is a top-ranked Amazon category leader and have received many 5-star reviews from prominent car dealership owners and managers. Max’s success as an author, general manager and entrepreneur has helped to cement his position as a preeminent voice leading the charge for modernization of the auto retail industry.

Max Zanan is a seasoned automotive industry expert with 20 years of experience in sales, F&I, compliance, and dealership management consulting. His goal is to help car dealers improve profitability while increasing customer satisfaction and retention. Zanan is a thought leader, organizer of the Perfect Dealership Conference, keynote speaker, and frequently quoted in trade publications such as Automotive News, Fixed Ops Journal, and Auto Dealer Today.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business podcast where every week we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:36] On today’s show, I get the opportunity to interview Max Zanan. Max is the author of four bestselling books on automotive retail management, and they’re entitled Perfect Dealership, Car Business 101, The Art and Science of Running a Car Dealership, and Effective Car Dealer. Each book — and I did this in my — reviewed them in my research for this interview. Each book has plenty of stars right next to it. So each book is a top-rated Amazon category leader and certainly has received many five-star reviews from prominent dealership owners and managers.

Max’s success as an author, general manager, and entrepreneur has helped position himself as the premier preeminent voice of leading the charge for modernization of the auto retail industry. He has 20 years of experience in sales, compliance, dealer management, consulting. And everywhere I looked, his name kept popping up. So I hope you enjoy my conversation with Max Zanan.

I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. And on this podcast, I interview buyers, sellers, dealmakers and other professional advisors on what creates value in a business and then how that business can be effectively sold at a premium value. So as I — in the introduction, you heard me talk about Max. And Max Zanan of MZ Dealer Services is literally the authority on automobile dealerships. I looked high and low for my research, during my research, and he is just that guy. And so I’m so grateful to introduce to you Max Zanan. So welcome to the show.

Max Zanan: [00:02:34] I mean, Ed, thank you for this wonderful introduction and the opportunity to be part of your podcast.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:41] Well, I’ll tell you, I’ve been looking forward to this because it’s a different animal. And like I said in my research and all the things that, all the different pieces that go into making a successful dealership, there’s a lot going on there. But before we get into my questions, can you talk a little bit about MZ Sealer Services?

Max Zanan: [00:03:07] So MZ Dealer Services is me. There’s nobody else.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:12] That’s the MZ part.

Max Zanan: [00:03:14] Right. There’s nobody else. Meaning literally, I do not even have an assistant.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:19] Okay.

Max Zanan: [00:03:20] And my job is to help dealers make money. And it sounds easy, but car business is so complicated and complex that there’s a reason why a lot of dealers do not make money. So again, there are different ways where you can make money. And I tried to bring all the options to the table, so the dealer doesn’t become a one trick pony. They can maximize profit opportunities in every single department because oftentimes, dealers make a mistake, and they obsess over the sales department, right, because they’re convinced that you can sell your way out of any trouble.

But when you buy a dealership, a franchised dealership, you’re not just getting a new car department. You’re getting a used car department. You’re getting a service department. You’re getting parts department. Sometimes you get in the body shop. So unless you’re maximizing every single opportunity that you paid for, you’re literally leaving money on the table.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:37] Yeah. Some of the research that I had found was that you look at each of those respective divisions as almost their own business within a larger business and each has their own various attributes that contribute to value. One of the things that — you know, I’ve been appraising companies for 30 years or so. And the funny thing is that everybody says business valuation, it’s both an art and science. And the funny thing was in the research, I saw the same thing about what you do. So can you talk a little bit about the art and science of what you do?

Max Zanan: [00:05:16] So the science is easy, right? Because there are certain KPIs. Right, whether it’s profit per car, number of line items on the repair order, number of hours worked per repair order, stuff like that. But the art part is the hard part, right, because you’re right, sometimes and actually most of the times, each department operates in a silo. To a degree, where there’s zero communication with other departments. And the art is actually to bring them all together and make sure that they work towards a common goal. Because the common goal is to sell cars and then to service cars and then to sell cars again. So if the sales department and the service department are in silos, you will never get that full circle.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:20] I get it. So is it a people issue? For the art part, is it a people issue? Is it a technology issue or is it an all of the above issue?

Max Zanan: [00:06:36] You know, it’s all of the above, plus lack of professional training issue. So the problem that we have is that I don’t think you’ll ever run into a Harvard MBA at a car dealership. Car dealers fail to attract talent the way Wall Street does.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:58] So why is that?

Max Zanan: [00:06:59] Or the way Silicon Valley does.

Ed Mysogland: [00:07:00] Yeah. Why is that?

Max Zanan: [00:07:02] Well, because people think of car dealers — you know, car dealers have a terrible reputation, right, up there with Congressman. Right?

Ed Mysogland: [00:07:10] Right.

Max Zanan: [00:07:13] So, when there is this stigma attached to the industry, nobody is growing up saying that Ed, I can’t wait to grow up and get into car sales. But let’s say Wall Street doesn’t have that stigma and you do have kids finishing school, going to college with a goal of getting into Wall Street. Whether as a trader, as a broker, as an analyst, they just want to be part of that institution.

Ed Mysogland: [00:07:47] I get it. Well, the funny thing you would think, like, isn’t it John Elway? Doesn’t he own like a portfolio of —

Max Zanan: [00:08:00] Everybody wants to be a car dealer. John Elway, you know, Mark Wahlberg. You know, everybody. I mean, Warren Buffett.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:09] Sure. That’s what I’m getting at. So you would think that with that kind of notoriety, that it would garner attention for more people to get into it, but it doesn’t seem to be the case. Maybe it’s a best kept secret in entrepreneurship.

Max Zanan: [00:08:27] Maybe, but it works against the dealer, right, because you cannot attract talented people.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:34] I see.

Max Zanan: [00:08:35] You don’t even get an opportunity, right? You literally get the bottom of the barrel.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:41] So how do you offset that? I mean, yeah, that’s a big problem.

Max Zanan: [00:08:45] The only way to offset it is to grow your own talent internally.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:49] Okay. And then that begs, how do you keep them? How do you keep them from going to the — is it all economics or is there something else that keeps the tech, keeps whoever there?

Max Zanan: [00:09:03] There is definitely something else because it’s not just money. Right. It’s the organizational culture.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:10] Okay.

Max Zanan: [00:09:11] So, and again, I think a lot of dealerships fail at that. You know, for example, if you talk about organizational culture, the best example I can give you is probably Zappos.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:25] Okay. Oh, sure. The shoe company. All right.

Max Zanan: [00:09:27] That’s right. I mean, there’s a reason why Amazon paid billion dollars for a shoe company. Right. It was the culture.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:35] I see.

Max Zanan: [00:09:36] And it’s that culture that keeps the people, you know, allows you to retain talent and attract talent so you can be the highest paying dealer on the block. But if the organizational culture is terrible, people will go elsewhere and work for less money and be happy.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:57] Yeah. Yeah. And certainly — and I’ve got a question that I found. This is a statement from CDK Global. I don’t know who CDK Global is, but it said that, and I’ll just read it. So it says, CDK said that there are a lot of assumptions made about Gen Z loosely defined as individuals born between 1997 and 2012, the need for instant gratification from simple online purchase experience to real time social media engagement. However, when it comes to buying a vehicle, CDK discovered that Gen Z seems to be more thoughtful and spend more time weighing decisions while the experience of buying new and used cars, of buying a newer used car more frustrating than any other generation. With Gen Z, the most interested in understanding all of their options. So that was 81 percent compared to Millennials of 73 percent, Gen X of 60 percent, and Baby Boomers 45 percent. The need for education, both online and from knowledgeable representative at the dealership proves to be critical according to the study.

So that, my point to you is it’s exactly what you were saying regarding employees and the people that are representing the dealership that the expectation of those that are now buying it has to be a better experience. And those people have to be able to have the education and communication. Right or no?

Max Zanan: [00:11:35] You know, to me, the most frustrating part about the statement is the fact that CDK Global made it. Right. I don’t think they have any place to make that statement because CDK Global makes an operating system that dealers use.

Ed Mysogland: [00:11:52] Well, then that makes sense.

Max Zanan: [00:11:54] So I don’t know how much CDK Global knows about car buying, car selling or the demographics of buyers. But to be honest with you, this is what they say about every generation. I mean, if you look back, I mean, they were saying the same thing about Millennials, that Millennials are different. I’m a Generation X, right, the best generation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:12:13] Yeah, it is.

Max Zanan: [00:12:15] Yeah. And everybody was saying, oh, my God, you know, Millennials, everything’s going to change. They will not be buying cars. They will be using rideshare. They’ll be Uber, this, lifting that. But at the end of the day, this is what happens in the real world. You become an adult, regardless of your generation. And as an adult, you know what happens? You move to suburbs. You know what happens in suburbs? You can’t live there with Uber. You need a car. You become an adult, you get married. You become an adult, you have kids. Right. You can use rideshare if you got to take your kid to the soccer practice. Right. So at the end of the day, you become like the generation before you and you buy cars exactly the same way as the generation before you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:08] And it’s such a great point. And you’re exactly right. And I didn’t think of it until you said it. But the same thing, the same concerns that I have put in my kids in cars and such are the same ones certainly my parents had, and your parents had.

Max Zanan: [00:13:25] That’s it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:27] So, as you know, I mean earnings drive business value. In reviewing the comments about all four of your books, it was a repeated theme that your tips led to increased profitability. Do you have any favorites that you could share without selling out?

Max Zanan: [00:13:50] Listen, the beauty of this business is there’s nothing I can trademark.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:57] I get you.

Max Zanan: [00:13:57] The secret sauce is really understanding how every part of the business operates. And I’ll give you the easiest example. For example, when you buy a car, at the end of the transaction, you’re going to go into the office where they’re going to try to sell you an extended warranty or gap insurance or tire and wheel protection. And this is the true profit center for any car dealership. That’s the finance department. So you can make money selling this product. And that’s what probably 99 percent of car dealers do. But you can probably double your profits as a dealer if you reinsure these products.

By reinsuring, I mean you open your own insurance company. And you buy a contractual liability insurance policy for each policy that you sell from the insurance company. So that’s why it’s called reinsurance. A real insurance company is reinsuring your business. And then if the premium dollars that you pay to your own insurance company exceed the claims dollars that you pay out, you will enjoy underwriting profit like any other insurance company. And the crazy part is that the underwriting profit is not taxed. That’s the beauty of insurance business as opposed to car business.

Ed Mysogland: [00:15:35] I get it. Okay.

Max Zanan: [00:15:37] So think about it. You can have, if you reserve properly for each policy that you sell, and you control your claims because you recondition your used cars before you sell them, you make sure you do the right thing by the customer. That underwriting profit is definitely there to be had. On top of it, this money, they don’t sit dormant, right? There is investment income that grows on these dollars. That’s how insurance companies make money.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:13] Sure, sure. No, I get it.

Max Zanan: [00:16:15] And the investment income is subject to tax. But again, at capital gains rate, not an ordinary income rate. So it’s a phenomenal, phenomenal opportunity for any car dealer to build an asset outside of the dealership.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:33] Got it.

Max Zanan: [00:16:33] Not be dependent on the factory and build generational wealth. And unfortunately, a lot of these dealers do not do it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:44] No, I mean, I can totally see that the synergy between the businesses that support the dealership are where the profit is, which literally blows the next question right out of the water, but I’m still going to ask it. So I’m told that in valuing a dealership, it’s made up of four components, the market value of the parts inventory, the market value of the equipment, the market value of the real estate, and then a multiple on the goodwill. Is that a fair assumption?

Max Zanan: [00:17:25] So think of it this way. You can ignore parts inventory and inventory because it just comes with the building, right? You can buy a dealership and say, you know what Ed, I’m only going to take the dealership, but you keep the parts. It doesn’t work like that, right? Yes, you can definitely put a dollar amount on the parts inventory. But at the end of the day, you still have to buy it. You can say, well, you take the parts inventory with you, I’m going to start fresh. Just doesn’t work like that.

Same thing with cars. If you’re selling, let’s say Nissan dealership to me and you have brand new Nissans on the lot. I mean, I can tell you Ed, I’m going to buy the dealership on the parts department, but you keep the cars, right? It just doesn’t work. We’re going to have to work out a number, how much I’m willing to pay for these cars, but the real crux of the issue is the blue sky. Blue sky is the value of the franchise. And the value of the franchise is something that market dictates. It’s not dictated by the dealer.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:35] Really? So where does the market get its multiple or factor to apply to the goodwill?

Max Zanan: [00:18:46] Well, you see most corporations in America report their earnings on a quarterly basis. Of course, car dealers are different, they report every month. So this information is public. And every manufacturer, so let’s say you are a Nissan dealer or you are a Chevy dealer, doesn’t matter. When the month is over, let’s say January is over, within the first week of February, your factory expects a complete financial statement electronically sent to them. They know the profitability of –.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:29] Of the franchise.

Max Zanan: [00:19:30] Exactly. So I think that’s how the –.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:34] Really?

Max Zanan: [00:19:35] Gets established. But then again, listen, a lot of it is common sense. For example, I’m sure there are more KIA dealers than Porsche dealers.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:45] Sure.

Max Zanan: [00:19:46] And you sell more KIAs, but you make less money per KIA sold as opposed to Porsche, right. You sell a few of those, but you make a lot more per car sold. And then let’s say, usually the high line brands have a higher multiple. Porsche being the highest multiple. Last time I checked, Porsche was selling for 11 multiple.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:13] 11 times what?

Max Zanan: [00:20:15] Earnings.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:16] Okay.

Max Zanan: [00:20:17] But these are crazy earnings.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:19] Sure, sure. No, I get.

Max Zanan: [00:20:20] Because you see what happens with the high line dealership, whether it’s Porsche or Mercedes, not only that you get to make money selling the car, right, because it’s a desirable product and people are willing to pay for the service and the car. But let’s assume for a second that you bought that Porsche, you’re not going to Jiffy Lube for an oil change. You’re not.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:44] Yeah, I know. You’re right.

Max Zanan: [00:20:46] So that service retention is almost guaranteed as opposed to you buying a Toyota Corolla. You can easily go to Jiffy Lube. Easily.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:58] You’re right.

Max Zanan: [00:20:59] So that service retention is basically guaranteed and the amount of money that you are charged in a service department. I think Mercedes, Porsche dealerships right now are over $200 an hour for labor. I mean these are almost like doctors.

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:23] Right. No, no, you’re right. You’re exactly right. Oh, man. So you said, so there’s, let’s just say the Porsche dealership, you have an 11 multiple on earnings. Is that all in? Like you were talking about like the reinsurance company, is that all dumped in? All right.

Max Zanan: [00:21:46] No, reinsurance company is out. It’s almost like an off of balance sheet.

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:52] Okay. So they’ll bring their own, if they want to do it, they’ll do it themselves. But that’s independent of the value of the dealership.

Max Zanan: [00:22:01] Exactly. So basically, your net profit, right, that you generated in sales, service, and parts.

Ed Mysogland: [00:22:10] I got it. So around here, there was a recent article about — and here in Indianapolis, we’re seeing some dealerships turning over. And these were family dealerships, and it doesn’t seem — the article was basically that the next generation, or I shouldn’t say that, the selling generation did not want to invest in modernization in order to make it more marketable. So then a different dealer from a neighboring town comes in and now they have a presence in Indianapolis. So are you seeing that the generation, I guess the generation before us, that’s trying to transition would rather sell than modernize?

Max Zanan: [00:23:13] So, I’m not sure because the way it works is that their brand standards that are dictated, let’s say, by Mercedes or Nissan or Toyota and they say Ed, if you are a Toyota dealer, your showroom has to look this way. That’s why they look the same regardless of whether you’re in Indianapolis or New York. And you have to spend your hardearned money to do that. It’s not open to negotiation. These brand standards are real, and I think generation is really irrelevant, right? Because whether it’s the older generation or younger generation, you just have to do what the factory tells you to do in terms of the brand standards. I think the generation that’s older than us, the baby boomers that are selling, I think they’re selling for one reason and one reason only. They’re selling because their kids are not interested in going into the business.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:16] But why? They must have seen mom and dad print money. I mean, especially those that have been around for 20, 30 years.

Max Zanan: [00:24:25] So, unfortunately, you know, car dealers, probably like many other business owners, they don’t tell their kids to go into the same business. Right. They tell them, go become a doctor, go and become a lawyer. You know, do whatever makes you happy, and they do. Right. And they become high school teachers making $40,000 a year because mom and dad are gazillionaires, and subsidize their lifestyle.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:58] No. You know what? That’s a great point and disappointing. But at the same time, it is what is. So you see industry consolidation more so than transfer from Gen one to Gen two. Fair statement?

Max Zanan: [00:25:19] You know, car business is extremely fragmented. I don’t think there’s another business like that because if you look you know, I mean, look at, let’s say, Internet search business, right? It’s Google or nothing. Right? Social media, it’s Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and Snapchat. There are 18,000 franchised dealers in America. The largest auto group publicly traded, it’s called AutoNation. They have 330 dealerships, out of 18,000.

Ed Mysogland: [00:25:57] Yeah. No, no. I see where you’re going.

Max Zanan: [00:25:59] So it’s super fragmented. So when we talk about consolidation, you know, even if it consolidates another 10 percent, it still be super fragmented.

Ed Mysogland: [00:26:08] Yeah. No, that’s a great point. Like I said, in communities like ours, it seems as though one family starts buying out another family. Like it seems in our community, it’s Tom Wood. It’s now, I’m trying to think of who’s buying them out but, Andy Moore. You know, he just continues to expand his market share, I guess. And it doesn’t seem — and that leads me to my next question. I mean, are individual buyers candidates for getting into this business or do you really have to, is the pedigree you really better have a real clear understanding of what you’re getting into because all the moving parts in this business is something unlike anything you’ve been accustomed to?

Max Zanan: [00:27:01] So listen, there’s this failsafe mechanism built into the buy sell process. For example, you would like to buy a Toyota dealership. Toyota will never approve you even if you have the money, because you don’t have the experience, because the factory is not interested in having dealerships failed because it’s a bad reflection on the name.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:28] I got it.

Max Zanan: [00:27:29] So it’s not like, well, let me just have some money and become a car dealer. There’s a very thorough approval process. And if you don’t have the experience, you would have to bring in an executive manager that would probably end up being your partner.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:47] I got it. Yeah, that’s fascinating. While I understand, like franchises, not necessarily automobile franchises, I do understand the rigors of going through the approval process. But again, I follow what you’re saying that it needs, you know, you need to have —

Max Zanan: [00:28:08] I think the difference between a Dunkin Donuts franchise and a Nissan franchise is that you and I can become Dunkin Donuts franchisees, but we will have to attend the Dunkin Donuts University.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:21] All right.

Max Zanan: [00:28:23] It doesn’t work like that in car business. You can buy the franchise and then go to school provided by the manufacturer.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:32] I got it. So the book you wrote during COVID. So in the book Effective Car Dealer: Selling Cars, Parts, and Labor After COVID-19, you talk about these are the silos, the sales, finance, financial and insurance compliance, service and parts. So what — and you alluded to this earlier, but I wanted to scratch the itch a little bit more on what area makes the biggest contribution to making the business saleable. I’m assuming it’s service, but I may be wrong.

Max Zanan: [00:29:12] SoSo there’s a huge problem in car business. And the problem is this, 97 percent of owners, partners, general managers all came up through sales.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:27] Okay.

Max Zanan: [00:29:28] They don’t understand parts and service. So since 97 percent of your owners or future owners came up through sales, to them, sales department is it. So all they want to know is how many cars you sell, how much money per car you make. They don’t really understand KPIs that are in parts and service.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:56] Got it.

Max Zanan: [00:29:57] And yes, you’re right. You know, parts and services are extremely profitable. For example, markup on labor in a car dealership is 75 percent. Markup on parts is 50 percent. You can never get these margins selling cars, ever.

Ed Mysogland: [00:30:17] Yeah. No, I get it, which leads me to my next question. So you mentioned KPIs a couple of times. So what are the leading indicators for a car dealer or are there tripwires that an owner needs to be aware of?

Max Zanan: [00:30:39] So to me, a huge indicator is service absorption. So service absorption means that the gross profit generated from parts and service covers all of your fixed expenses. For the entire operation, not just for parts and service.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:00] Oh, okay. That’s a telling one.

Max Zanan: [00:31:03] Right. And so, for example, if your service absorption is 100 percent, that means you cover 100 percent of your fixed expenses through parts and service. Most dealers are nowhere near 100 percent. They’re below it. But there are some dealers that are above because you can be above 100 percent. You can be 110, 120 if you are a superstar. And what that tells me, if you are 100 or above, is that it doesn’t cost anything to sell cars. Right. It doesn’t cost anything. Meaning you can actually give cars away to grab market share because all of your expenses are covered, fixed expenses by parts and service.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:52] Got it. So as the previous generation, we touched on this, and I guess I wanted to go back on how do you size up the next leader in the business? Like, for example, say the owner is going to just ride it out. I’m going to hold on to this, you know, and I’m going to leave involuntarily. They’re going to take me out in a box. So how does — I mean, are there certain attributes that you can see in dealer leadership? Like this is a man or woman that has, you know, this is the pedigree that I’m looking for that will preserve my investment?

Max Zanan: [00:32:48] You know, I wish it was that easy.

Ed Mysogland: [00:32:50] Me too.

Max Zanan: [00:32:53] So what usually ends up happening is that you have to grow your own talent. You have to invest into education. And this education is very, very limited. It’s not like you can go to school and major in dealership management. It’s not really an option. So you have to find information elsewhere. And there are good resources out there. There’s National Association Dealer — Association of Automotive Dealers, NADA. They have a university where you can enroll your employees. And it’s not cheap, but it’s worth every dollar.

And then usually a State Dealer Association would have some other courses available to its local dealer body. And again, you have to take advantage of it because these courses are available. But if you actually go there, you will see that the attendance is really, really poor. Because, you know, car dealers, as I mentioned before, they have to report every 30 days. So they live in a 30-day cycle, which really is counterproductive. It prevents you from building a long-term strategy, building a vision.

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:21] Because of the expectations to the franchise itself. So they’re not able to — they are expected to have a certain level of profit. Right or?

Max Zanan: [00:34:33] Well, it’s either profit — it’s not in profit, but let’s say if you are a Chevy dealer, right, the factory will say, well, in the month of February, we expect you to sell this many cars. So it becomes a rat race.

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:51] So does it — when does it trigger, I don’t want to say a default, but when do you — I mean, how many missed 30-day cycles can you —

Max Zanan: [00:35:04] Many. Many

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:05] Okay. So I can say, look, you know, I’m sending my best guys to this university to get educated. But as a consequence to doing that, it’s a good long-term play, but short term, I’m going to take it on the chin because I’m sending these guys to get educated. That fair statement?

Max Zanan: [00:35:28] Yeah. But again, this is a dealership specific education. They’re not going to NADA University to learn sociology and psychology.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:37] All right. So how do you handcuff those people that you’re investing in?

Max Zanan: [00:35:43] So I think there’s a saying, like when the CEO is speaking to the CFO. And the CFO says, you know, we’re spending all this money training people, what if they leave? And the CEO says, what if we go then they stay?

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:01] I get it. That makes sense. Have you seen any noble ways to keep people? I mean, I know originally you were talking a little bit about culture, and you can go back to it. But how do I keep my best people?

Max Zanan: [00:36:20] So the hardest people to find right now are technicians. So as the dealer principal, you have to be really creative and come up with ways to keep them.

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:34] And you were saying it’s not all economic.

Max Zanan: [00:36:37] It’s not. Exactly. So, for example, what I learned is that every technician is addicted to buying tools. That’s their livelihood. They buy tools. This is what they spend their money on. Because as cars become more and more complicated, you need more and more sophisticated tools to work on these cars.

Ed Mysogland: [00:37:00] Well, it’s funny you say that, because in — so I’ve got a fellow that is coming on the podcast that specializes in the sale of automobile repair businesses. And one of the things in that research was that the technicians bring their own tools. Is that the same in dealerships or no?

Max Zanan: [00:37:28] Yes. So there’s certain special tools that are extremely expensive and they’re owned by the dealership. But your day-to-day wrenches, et cetera, are owned by technicians. So basically when you hire a technician, he shows up with his toolbox and then he keeps spending money to put more tools in his toolbox. So one of the most innovative ways, I think, to retain a technician is to go and help them buy tools.

Ed Mysogland: [00:38:02] Nice. No, that’s a great, you know, here’s X number of dollars per month for you to keep your toolbox up to date and find —

Max Zanan: [00:38:13] Another way, which is very effective, is to really come up with a formula and say for each year of service, it doesn’t matter if you’re a technician or you work in accounting and you’re selling cars for each year of service, there’ll be a bonus of X amount of dollars. So listen, if Ed is at XYZ Toyota for 15 years, right. And the bonus is $1,000 per year, you collect $15,000 around Christmas, which I think is worth it for the dealer and definitely is worth it for you. Because even if you were to get another job, you would start at zero, right?

Ed Mysogland: [00:38:58] Right. A hundred percent. Yeah. That’s a great idea. Okay. So I’ve got a couple more questions if you got some time.

Max Zanan: [00:39:10] Sure.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:11] So, my first question is, where is the puck going in this industry? I mean, it seems as though — you know, it’s a volatile time, but yet maybe not.

Max Zanan: [00:39:24] This is a really controversial topic because as you know, this business operates based on franchise laws and we are living in the environment where every manufacturer wants to be like Tesla. And Tesla operates outside of franchise laws.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:54] Really? How so?

Max Zanan: [00:39:55] Tesla sells direct. Tesla was able to [inaudible]. So Tesla sells direct to consumer. And now basically what happens in every boardroom, whether it’s Ford, GM, you know, there are two factions in every boardroom. There are old dogs that understand that you cannot sell cars in the United States without dealers. And then there’s another fraction that says, but wait, look at Tesla. And then they keep pointing at Tesla’s valuations. And Tesla is valued more than every manufacturer combined on planet earth. That’s a stock valuation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:40:40] Sure, sure. I get it.

Max Zanan: [00:40:41] Right. So these factories, again, whether it’s Ford or GM, they’re trying to come up with creative ways of how to cut out a dealer and sell direct to consumer. And that’s the real danger that I see. So to answer your question, where the puck is going, hopefully these manufacturers will understand that our franchise model is more than 100 years old. It has been proven and battle tested. And it’s really, really good for the consumer.

Whereas the direct-to-consumer model is extremely complicated in the sense that the manufacturer doesn’t have expertise selling cars, they have expertise making cars. So, for example, if you want to sell direct to consumer, most consumers have trade ins. Right. Who’s going to put a dollar amount on the trade in? In the car dealership, we have a used car manager for that. But if you’re doing this as direct-to-consumer online, you know, it becomes problematic.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:02] And this is also the collapse of Carvana. Is that how that fell apart or no?

Max Zanan: [00:42:10] Well, Carvana fell apart because the math doesn’t work. You know, math is math.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:17] Right.

Max Zanan: [00:42:17] Right. So let’s say, you know, just to use round numbers, let’s say every used car that you sell, let’s say you make $1500 on the sale of the vehicle in a dealership. And then there’s other profit by selling warranties, you know, and stuff like that. But let’s say you didn’t sell anything in that office, you only sold the car and you made $1500 dollars. It’s a very respectable number, but that’s assuming that you have a local customer. They took the car and they drove home. Let’s say Carvana made the same $1500 dollars, but they had to ship the car to Alaska.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:00] Oh, sure. That makes sense.

Max Zanan: [00:43:03] You know, your $1500 is gone.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:06] Yeah, I get it. I guess then the car buying experience is always brutal and everybody wants to know why it takes four hours to buy a car. I mean is that designed to car buying fatigue and I mean —

Max Zanan: [00:43:34] You know, I’ll be honest with you, it only takes four hours because of the consumer.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:41] Oh, really?

Max Zanan: [00:43:42] Right. Because they come in not knowing what they want. All the things that you read about them doing research, all that research is gone by the time they walk into the showroom. And they’re like, “Well, I’m looking for an SUV”. Two row, three row. They start choosing the model, go on in the test drive, you know, and then let’s say the wife says, I hate it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:44:12] I get it.

Max Zanan: [00:44:13] Okay. So we start the process all over again. So let’s say, for example, you walk into a Jeep dealership, right, and you want to buy an SUV. Jeep makes SUVs of every size, right? There’s a tiny one. There’s a Cherokee. There’s a Grand Cherokee. There’s a Grand Cherokee longer version. And then there’s a Grand Wagoneer, which is like a school bus. And now, the consumer has to make a decision. And that decision making process is extremely long.

Ed Mysogland: [00:44:46] Sure. But once they’ve established price, it seems as though, the meter starts all over again waiting for financing and waiting for the opportunity to go through that process.

Max Zanan: [00:44:58] You see, this is not so clear cut because, yes, if you walk into a dealership and we pick the car for you and we settled on the price, and you don’t have a trade in, and you have excellent credit, that financing process is instantaneous, right? You are easy to get approved on. But usually, most people have a trade in, right. So now it’s the reverse because when you have a trade in, you are selling the car to the dealer.

Ed Mysogland: [00:45:31] Sure. I get it.

Max Zanan: [00:45:32] So now you negotiate on the trade in. And then what if you have some blemishes on your credit? And maybe you were hoping to get that low APR, but you don’t qualify. So the dealer has to find a different bank. And that takes time. And then you go into that office to sign the paperwork and the finance manager has to go through his presentation and present to you every protection product that’s available for sale, because you will then turn around and sue the dealership if this product wasn’t presented.

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:10] I get it. Okay. So it really isn’t a vehicle to, you know — I mean, certainly there’s some upselling that goes on, but it’s not a tactic to wear you down so you buy more.

Max Zanan: [00:46:29] It is not. And I think every dealer would want to speed up the process.

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:34] Sure.

Max Zanan: [00:46:37] If it takes me to sell a car and the process is four hours and I’m the salesperson, I cannot take another customer for the next four hours while I’m selling the car to you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:46] Sure. That’s what I would have thought. I get it. So at the conclusion of every podcast, I’ve always asked everyone I’ve interviewed, what is the single best piece of advice that you could give our listeners that would have the most impact on their dealership? What would that be?

Max Zanan: [00:47:08] Make sure that all of the departments in your car dealership are operating and working towards a common goal. And you have to define that common goal. And it has to be very, very specific because you can’t say our common goal is to sell cars. Right. It’s a little too vague because every dealer’s goal is to sell cars. Yet to me, the dealer, his goal was not to sell cars.

Ed Mysogland: [00:47:35] I see.

Max Zanan: [00:47:36] Right. So you have to say, well, my goal is to sell cars because, and what is the value proposition that you are bringing in your sales department? And then after, let’s say I bought a new car from you, what is the value proposition that you bring in in your service department? Because I could have had an amazing experience buying a car. And then I come for service and experience is terrible. I will never be back to buy another client, that dealership, unfortunately. Even though the sales experience was phenomenal. That’s how interconnected these silos are.

Ed Mysogland: [00:48:19] I get it. So it’s funny you say that because I, for my youngest daughter, she has a little Hyundai Santa Fe. And I took it in for a recall. And it came out and here was four pages long of all the recommended things that we do. And I mean it was like five grand of stuff. And it was like, yeah, I felt I was getting squeezed and what do you do? And so my point to you is you’re right, it left a real bad taste in my mouth that I’m not really certain — I’m all for you making money, I’m just not all for you making money only off of me. It just — there was a lot to what they gave me. And when I vetted it out, I was getting jammed. I mean, that’s the long and the short of it.

And so yeah, but back to your original comment when we first got started, you know, the reputation of the industry is a tough one to overcome. And again, it’s things like that that cause it. So I’m with you. But to your point, the good dealerships will always sell. Those that have the value proposition that have the synergy between the silos, I’m a hundred percent with you that those are the ones that you’re looking for, and those are the ones that will get the premium, you know?

Max Zanan: [00:50:08] Yeah, exactly. And the other piece of advice that I can give, it’s a tough pill to swallow. I encourage every dealership owner to mystery shop his own business. And you can really have a heart attack doing it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:50:32] Yeah, that makes sense. So what’s the best way that listeners can find you, other than all you have to do is put Max in Google and you got the first few pages? So what’s the best way we can do that?

Max Zanan: [00:50:50] I mean, listen, as I told you before, you know, I am a one man show. And the best way to get in touch with me is just call me. I actually answer the phone. There’s no answering service. There’s no secretary. I know how to use a phone. So I actually, like, hold back.

Ed Mysogland: [00:51:10] Got it. So you kick it old school. That’s –.

Max Zanan: [00:51:13] Yeah. Yeah.

Ed Mysogland: [00:51:14] Well, I will have everything we talked about as well as a link to your website and everywhere that you can find Max. Including, if you’re all right, I’ll have your phone number in the show notes. So, Max, you a hundred percent lived up to the hype I was hoping you would. It was awesome. I so enjoyed our time together.

Max Zanan: [00:51:42] Thank you. Thank you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:51:43] So thanks so much for being on.

Outro: [00:51:46] Thank you for joining us today on How To Sell Your Business podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

Tagged With: auto retail industry, automobile dealer, Business Owners, Car Business 101, dealer management, Ed Mysogland, Effective Car Dealer, entreprenuers, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, Max Zanan, Perfect Dealership, pricing, reinsurance, selling a business, The Art and Science of Running a Car Dealership, valuation, value

How Clear Processes Add Value, with Marie Mills, Clear Solutions, LLC

February 7, 2023 by John Ray

Clear Solutions
How to Sell a Business
How Clear Processes Add Value, with Marie Mills, Clear Solutions, LLC
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Clear Solutions

How Clear Processes Add Value, with Marie Mills, Clear Solutions, LLC (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 10)

Marie Mills, Owner of Clear Solutions, LLC, is an experienced business process analyst, and she joined host Ed Mysogland to talk about the value of documenting processes for a business. Marie discussed the importance of clear and efficient processes regardless of the industry or size of business. They also covered how to get started, why two weeks isn’t enough time to create documentation, who should do it, the return on the investment, the impact on the sale of the business, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

Clear Solutions, LLC

Whether you’re ready to scale, preparing to sell, or simply tired of putting out fires, clarifying your processes is key to success.

Clear Solutions works with you and your team to capture the knowledge and expertise that is key to running your business well. They show you how to shift from running your business out of your head to running it from clear and user-friendly instructions and information, written at the right level of detail.

Marie’s method takes a structured approach to ensure your documentation and processes support you as your business grows and shifts. Most documentation efforts fail because they don’t include the framework to effectively build, manage, and maintain the work. Clear content is key and the framework will keep it going.

The process: Clear Solutions uses any existing documentation as the foundation. They focus on your top priority processes. They provide templates that will make the documents easy to find, easy to use, and easy to build upon. They transform your detailed knowledge and vision of how you want your business to run into clear instructions for everyone on your team.

As you work together, you can take on as much or little of the work as you want. They track the work and keep it moving forward.

Company website | LinkedIn | Facebook

Marie Mills, Owner, Clear Solutions, LLC

Marie Mills, Owner, Clear Solutions, LLC

Marie Mills has over 15 years of experience helping organizations capture and clarify their processes to create a shared understanding and improve efficiencies.

She has a passion for understanding the nuts and bolts of business operations. Launching two small businesses prior to starting Clear Solutions provided her with first-hand experience running a business and all the challenges that go with it.

As a business process analyst, Marie learned how to ask the right questions to understand the work at a detailed level. She worked with employees in a variety of roles, in small, medium, and large businesses, across different industries. She developed a practical approach to capturing the process details, in plain language, that worked every time.

Clear Solutions helps business owners succeed by freeing up their time for what they do best – running their business.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business podcast, where, every week, we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors, and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland : [00:00:36] On today’s episode, I had the opportunity to interview Mary Mills. And great timing, you know, we’re having some turnover, and it’s one of those things of – oh, my gosh – as far as what I don’t know about the role that I’m trying to fill. And it was just awesome and so fortuitous for me to talk to Mary Mills of Clear Solutions. That’s what she does. She is all about documenting procedures and processes.

Ed Mysogland : [00:01:13] And from a business value standpoint, one of the things I really believe is that a business that has documented processes and you can hand those to a buyer is a more valuable business. And Marie, she hit it out of the park as far as how this process works, why perhaps you shouldn’t do it yourself, how your employees might react if you started down that path of documentation, and a whole host of other things. Out of all of the niche businesses, I think she’s got a great one. And I hope that you’ll – in fact, I shouldn’t say I hope. I know that you’ll enjoy this conversation I had with Mary Mills of Clear Solutions.

Ed Mysogland : [00:02:01] I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. I interview buyers, sellers, dealmakers, and other professional advisors about what creates value in a business and how that business is effectively sold at a premium value. On today’s show, you have no idea how excited I am to have Marie Mills of Clear Solutions.

Ed Mysogland : [00:02:22] So, like I said in the introduction, Marie helps businesses clarify, and prove, and document processes in plain language so the business can run consistently and efficiently. She’s been doing this for over 15 years, and has provided this service through her own business, Clear Solutions, for the past six years. So, Marie, welcome to the show. It’s great to have you.

Marie Mills: [00:02:47] Thank you. Great to be here, Ed.

Ed Mysogland : [00:02:51] So, I’m in this now with a situation where we have a team member that is leaving and, you know, I’m stuck. I know how to do her job. I have done her job. And I’m the guy. And here I am, how fortuitous that you and I are talking. You know, you have quite a niche, but can you tell a little bit more about Clear Solutions and just the organization, how you work, and where you’re working.

Marie Mills: [00:03:33] Yeah. You bet. So, I work with a number of different companies, big, small, different industries, what industry they work in is really not that important. They could be making about 200,000 a year. They could be making over 20 million. All of those have been my clients. They might have zero employees and they might have over 150 employees. So, what they all have in common is they have some issues, they have some challenges running their business that has to do with process, that has to do with the lack of clear and efficient process. And that’s where I come in and that’s where I help them.

Ed Mysogland : [00:04:19] Well, like I was saying, in my situation, I don’t want to say I’m stuck, but as a practitioner, I’m sitting here going, “All right. You know, this is not that big of a deal.” But whether it be preparing for this podcast or all the other things that I have to do today, I’m now focused on, “All right. I got to think about this onboarding or hiring and then onboarding this person.” And, boy, wouldn’t it be great if I had, you know, here’s kind of the playbook on your position. And I’ve been doing it for 30 years. So, I guess that’s kind of where I want to start, is, am I alone?

Marie Mills: [00:05:00] You’re definitely not alone. I mean, I have got a few panicked calls from businesses like, “Hey. My key person is leaving. They’ve been here 5 years, 10 years, 15 years, and they just gave two weeks notice. And they’ve always kept things running smoothly and now they’re leaving. And believe it or not, I don’t actually know what they do.” And that’s in addition to the I have to hire, I have to onboard, I have to do all those things. And if you don’t have a clear process, now you know, it’s a lot. Now, you have to think of the process as you need it.

Ed Mysogland : [00:05:39] Yeah. And the funny thing is, you know, you don’t think of the process complexity until you start being empathetic to the next person. And you take for granted all of the experience, all of the reps that you’ve had, either doing it or overseeing it or whatever role you’re playing. Now, all of a sudden, it’s a different animal, where someone coming is in cold. They have a working knowledge of the industry, but they have no idea how to work in your environment.

Ed Mysogland : [00:06:21] So, I know there wasn’t a question there. I’m crying on your shoulder, really. So, one of the things that we talked about or we wanted to talk about is the difference between process and procedure. So, what’s the difference?

Marie Mills: [00:06:37] Yeah. Great question, there’s a lot of confusion around that. And I like to keep things simple whenever possible to avoid confusion. I think, technically, if you talk to people who are really into process, they’ll say, “Well, a process is more general. It’s higher level. And in a big company, it will cross multiple departments. And a procedure is more of the step by step instructions.”

Marie Mills: [00:07:02] So, with the work I do, I think keeping it simple is really the best approach. So, I use the terms interchangeably. I’ll say process, procedure. And people talk about their SOPs or their standard operating procedures. I’m like, “Yeah. It’s all the same thing.” Define it. What is it? It’s like you’re following a series of steps to achieve a desired outcome. So, if you weren’t following a process or you didn’t have a process, you would be working randomly and just kind of doing it however every single time. So, the whole point is to have a series of steps to that desired outcome.

Ed Mysogland : [00:07:42] So, I was forced to think about how I am going to do this. I have options. I could I could dump it into the other staff members, kind of divide the roles. But you can’t grow doing that. And we’re always constantly trying to grow our business. And by saying, “Okay. We have a hole here, we’ll just kind of divide roles because it’s the easy way and they have an understanding of the process.”

Ed Mysogland : [00:08:24] So, where I’m heading with this is from a development standpoint, like I said earlier, if I could just hand somebody, “This is the playbook.” So, how do I do that? Because I was thinking about, “All right. Here’s what I’ll do. I’m going to strap on my dictation machine and I’m just going to talk through this. And then, I’m going to memorialize it, this is how you do it.” But I suspect that’s probably not the way this whole thing goes.

Marie Mills: [00:09:00] Well, it’s not a bad idea of how it goes. I mean, so you start with finding out who understands how the job works, like whatever the individual tasks that’s involved. And then, for each task, each process, what are you trying to do and how do you do it. And then, you need to write it down because it’s not enough just to have it in your head. That doesn’t work very well. It’s too easy to have misunderstandings. So, you write it down.

Marie Mills: [00:09:29] So, you could get your dictation machine on and you could speak into it, and then you could have somebody just dictate it word for word. And that would be a good start. And that’s what I would call the brain dump. That’s your initial brain dump. So, first you’ve identified what it is you’re going to document. And then, you go to each piece and you do the initial brain dump of how it works.

Marie Mills: [00:09:51] Now, the difference between how it’s going to come out of your mouth and how easy it is for somebody else to read that and understand it – that’s the next step – you’ve got to organize it. You have to organize it so that you could hand that document to somebody, and with relatively little explanation from you, you want to provide some basic context, but relatively little explanation. Now, they can read that and understand what is it they’re trying to do and how do they do it, and how do they know that they’ve done it correctly in the end.

Marie Mills: [00:10:24] And so, when I work with companies, that’s basically what I’m doing. I’m sitting down and I’m saying, “What are the issues you’re facing? Okay. So, these processes aren’t clear. Let’s start talking about each process individually, and then let’s get really clear on that until it’s done.”

Ed Mysogland : [00:10:45] Okay. So, your role is one of scrutinizing the clarity of the process. Is that a fair statement or no?

Marie Mills: [00:10:54] Yes, it is. And it’s also capturing it. It’s capturing it. Because many, many businesses, they don’t really have the processes written down. Somebody comes in, they’re trained. There might be a few notes here and there. It’s what I call the oral tradition. You’re just passing it down through oral tradition. And it’s from my head, now it’s in your head. And maybe you understood what I said, maybe you didn’t, maybe you remembered everything I told you, maybe you didn’t, probably you didn’t.

Marie Mills: [00:11:26] And so then, I’m helping them really capture all the details. And then, as we do it, as we’re capturing all the details, that initial brain dump, it’s like, “Okay. Let’s go through and organize this and see where’s the sequence, where are the handoffs, who else is involved in this, and how do you go from the beginning to the end, and what’s the end and all that.” So, it’s the capturing and the clarifying and the organizing.

Ed Mysogland : [00:11:56] I get it. So, who does this? You know, is it the business owner that documents it and oversees it? Or do you say, “You know what? Valued employee, I need your help here. Just in case you get run over by a bus, we need to figure out how to keep going.” Is it fair to ask them to help at this initial stage?

Marie Mills: [00:12:27] Yeah. Absolutely. Because they are like the keepers of the knowledge. They’re the ones that know how this works. So, they’re the subject matter experts. So, now, you’ve identified which processes you need to write down and who’s the subject matter expert. And then, you go talk to them and you could start. It’s a great thing to ask your people to write down what they do. And that is, again, a great start.

Marie Mills: [00:12:54] It will only take you so far, because usually the people who are really good at doing the work aren’t necessarily really good at writing down what they do. So, not everybody is a great writer. Not everybody is great at organizing information.

Marie Mills: [00:13:09] And the other thing is it’s kind of counterintuitive. But the more you know, the more likely you are to leave a detail out. Because all these assumptions, you know, we’re so used to doing this, “Oh, yeah. I forgot you wouldn’t know that. Oh, yeah. I forgot not everybody would know that.”

Marie Mills: [00:13:28] So then, the subject matter expert – absolutely – they could start by writing it down. And then, you want somebody who’s more objective, who’s not actually the expert to come in and read it, and then start saying, “Well, wait a minute. What did you mean by this? And what does this acronym mean?” And then, that’s how you refine it. Sometimes that’s the owner and sometimes it’s the person doing it. It’s whoever’s doing the most familiar.

Ed Mysogland : [00:13:58] I wonder whether the employee feels threatened, like, “Here. Write the playbook for how you do your job. Just in case.”

Marie Mills: [00:14:15] “Just in case. And get it done within two weeks, if you don’t mind.” This comes up a lot. And so, when I work with a company, usually there’s one main point person. It could be the owner or it could be somebody else who’s in charge of a division. And I work with them, so they’re my primary liaison between me and all the people I’ll talk to. And I first want to make sure that everybody understands why we’re doing this. And it’s not because we’re going to then replace you or take away your job. And then, when I work with them directly, I let them know that.

Marie Mills: [00:14:54] And it’s not just saying we’re doing this because we want to run more efficiently. It’s really showing the advantages of doing it. It’s like, This should make your job easier. This will make it easier for somebody to fill in if you want to go on vacation. This is going to make it easier for you to go on vacation because somebody else is going to know how to fill in for you when they need to.

Ed Mysogland : [00:15:17] Sure. No, that’s a great point.

Marie Mills: [00:15:20] And, also, oftentimes when you get these employees and they’ve been around for a long time, it’s not so much – I won’t to say taken for granted, but people, they’re used to that person really handling all this work. And then, when you write it down, I’ve had managers and owners just go, “Oh, my gosh. I had no idea how valuable this employee is and how much they did.” And the employee will say the same thing, “I didn’t realize I did so much.” So, really, it’s like a way of recognizing all their hard work.

Ed Mysogland : [00:15:58] Yeah. Let’s visit at my next review about just how valuable I am.

Marie Mills: [00:16:03] Exactly. Right?

Ed Mysogland : [00:16:04] Oh, my goodness. Right.

Marie Mills: [00:16:05] Yeah. Exactly.

Ed Mysogland : [00:16:07] So, how do you prioritize? I mean, where do you start? I mean, I’m sitting here, for me, I’m going to say, “All right. I started the money and work backwards. Whatever gets me closest to being able to pay the bills is where I probably should start.” Is that right or no?

Marie Mills: [00:16:25] Okay. So, oftentimes, there’s many, many processes that need to be documented and improved, so you can start by looking at what is a priority for the business right now. Now, if you have an employee who just gave two weeks notice and they’re a key employee and there’s a lot that employee knows that maybe somebody else doesn’t know, that’s a priority right there, that person’s job.

Marie Mills: [00:16:54] And then, within that job, to be perfectly honest, two weeks is not enough time to document what somebody knows. So, you’re not going to be able to even capture everything that they know. So then, you’re going to say, What are those things that, if you walked away tomorrow, and nobody else knew that could really cripple a business or at least cost a lot churn and scrambling to reinvent the wheel? Those are the kinds of things. And so, I start by trying to get an outline of what are the tasks that you do and what are the most important ones.

Marie Mills: [00:17:32] And if you’re not used to documenting processes, I also recommend don’t pick the easiest and don’t pick the hardest. Pick something in between and start warming up to what this is going to take.

Ed Mysogland : [00:17:49] Well, I know a lot of business owners that we’re bumping into these days are using Loom, and this is a video. And to me, I don’t think it’s any different than the dictation illustration I used earlier. I mean, you can show me but somebody’s got to document it. You know, what I thought was super easy as far as procedural, it may not be for the next person. You can watch that video over and over and over again and kind of get the gist. But the finer points, I’m with you. I don’t think that’s the best way to say it. I like Loom. It may be great for here’s kind of an example at a high level of how this works. But as a replacement for my SOP, probably not. Do you agree?

Marie Mills: [00:18:55] I agree. I think video has its place. Like things that are highly visual, like if you’re going through a complicated software procedure, trying to write that line by line, that’s not easy to follow. But if you have a little video about that, that’s good. But, yeah, I mean, having context and having the outline of what you’re doing is most helpful in most cases.

Ed Mysogland : [00:19:22] I get it. Well, earlier, you had talked about capturing and clarifying the process. Can you talk a little bit about why that works so well?

Marie Mills: [00:19:36] Why it’s so important to capture and clarify it?

Ed Mysogland : [00:19:39] Yeah. So, the best approach was capturing and clarifying a process is an iterative approach. And I’m just wondering what makes that approach work so well? Because I’m assuming, this is a living document that, once you get it down, you’re constantly tweaking it and updating it, right?

Marie Mills: [00:20:08] Yes. Right. Yes. That’s a really good point. So, it’s not a one and done. Your process documentation is living documentation that needs to be updated as your business changes. And capturing it, initially, I found that an iterative process is really the most efficient way to go, because there’s usually more to it than you think. When you go into it, you say, “Oh. I’m going to document this. This is so easy. It’s going to take me an hour. And then, we’ll do a review and then it’ll be done.”

Marie Mills: [00:20:42] And the reality is, again, going back to kind of the curse of excellency or whatever, where somebody knows it so well, they write it down, they say I think this is everything. And then, somebody else reads it and go, “Wait a minute. I don’t quite understand this or this.”

Marie Mills: [00:21:00] And so, the iterative approach is where you start with a brain dump and then you have somebody else review it and organize it. And then, you go back and let’s review the draft. Now, here’s our questions. Now, expand on it again. And you just keep doing that. And the key point is that you walk away from it for a while. Because you’re going to come back to it with fresh eyes and that’s where the things that don’t quite make sense and aren’t completely explained, that’s where you’re going to catch that.

Ed Mysogland : [00:21:33] That’s a great point. I guess this is a long term process. And for someone like me that is scrambling now trying to document a 40 year old business and all the processes that we have implemented over the years, that’s a big ask. And for people that are looking at selling their business, something is better than nothing. But at the same time, I don’t think that you’re going to see the value benefit by just throwing together a Google Doc and thinking that this is my SOP, and, oh, by the way, we wrote it a month ago.

Ed Mysogland : [00:22:30] And that’s kind of my next question, is, from a value standpoint – I know this is kind of a loaded question – I know from where I sit that a business is more valuable that has documentable processes. You read it in Michael Gerber’s E-Myth, the whole franchise world, they’re about that. Let the system be the expert, not the people.

Ed Mysogland : [00:23:09] I mean, I want to ask you about value, but I’m not really certain how to ask the question, other than you’ve been to different businesses, you’ve seen it, can you tell the difference pre and post implementation of this process? You know what I mean? Because I’m certain you worked with them on a long term basis. And I know that was the longest question that you’ve ever heard, but you know where I’m going with it, right?

Marie Mills: [00:23:42] Yeah. It’s an investment for sure. It’s an investment. And then, how does it pay off? How soon can you get the payoff? Obviously, it depends on the situation, but I almost always see a payoff right away. Because one of the biggest benefits to doing this, is that, yes, you have clear documented processes, but you’ve also had the discussion.

Marie Mills: [00:24:09] It generates a discussion that is so valuable. Because people come in and they just do the work and why did they do that. “Well, I’ve always done it this way.” And then, when you sit down and say, “Hey, I really want to make this clear and write this down,” it generates a discussion about why do we do it that way, why do we do it that way.

Marie Mills: [00:24:28] And I’ll tell you a story, a true story. So, I was working with a company and I was documenting the receiving processes. And the guy is telling me, “This packet comes in, we check it off, blah, blah, blah. We take the packing list and then we walk over to accounting and we put it in their inbox.” “What does accounting do with it?” “Oh, I have no idea. That’s just what I was told.”

Ed Mysogland : [00:24:52] So, later, I go down to accounting and I said, “Hey, you know, that packing list that receiving gives you, what do you do with it?” And they go, “Oh, yeah. I put it in the recycle bin.” And I said, “Why do you think they give it to you?” “Well, I don’t know. They always did so I just let them do it.” And so, I said, “Well, we should talk.” And we all got in the room and kind of talked it out and we all had a really good laugh.

Marie Mills: [00:25:14] But it’s that kind of thing, you know, that’s a small thing, but you take that and then you multiply it by all your different processes, now you’ve got time wasted, energy wasted.

Ed Mysogland : [00:25:29] A hundred percent. That’s a great example. Because the same kind of thing, I mean, if you came in our business, you would see the same thing. It was like, “Well, that’s how we do it. What do you mean?” Ignore the efficiency. This is just how we do it.

Marie Mills: [00:25:53] This is just the way it is.

Ed Mysogland : [00:25:55] And the funny thing is – and I know I’m asking you some questions that we didn’t really talk about – for the older folks, the older sellers, let’s take 60 and up, I’m trying to figure out whether this is an easy process to sell them or not. You know what I mean?

Ed Mysogland : [00:26:28] Because we talk to a lot of business owners that are getting ready to sell and they’re saying, “Hey. What can I do in order to prepare and maximize value?” And, certainly, this is on the list. But at the same time, I’m not certain they buy into it. Maybe I’m wrong. But I mean, the people you work with based on age – and sorry, I’m kind of in that camp – how do you work through that?

Marie Mills: [00:27:02] Yeah. So, I don’t know if it’s so much about age or if it’s just about kind of mindset about how the business runs. But I think one thing I see – I’ve seen this several times – is that the owner manager says, “Yeah. Yeah. This is what my people do.” Well, guess what? That’s not what their people do. Their people do something else, and they don’t know that until it’s written down.

Marie Mills: [00:27:33] And so, if you’re preparing to sell your business, what comes to mind is a couple of things. You want to be informed. You don’t want to show up to sell your business and say, “Oh, by the way, I had no idea that’s what we did.” That’s not going to look good. You want to know how your business is currently running.

Marie Mills: [00:27:57] And my understanding when you sell a business, isn’t there some kind of transition period from the old owner to the new owner and training. So, what are you going to do? Just fill, like, 100 million phone calls from the new owner or you could have your processes.

Ed Mysogland : [00:28:14] You know what? That’s a great example. And to be honest with you, one of the things why a business owner would want to do this is that it lessens the amount of time they have to work with the buyer post-sale. Because that could be a one to three year process. I mean, it takes time to transition the business. So, having all of this knowledge out of people’s heads onto paper, and then it becomes clarifying, like you said, clarifying the process, do you understand how we operate then, then it’s a matter of getting out. So, if I’m a business owner, I’m like, “Man, if I could reduce the amount of transition time, this is a really good investment.” That’s a great point. Go ahead.

Marie Mills: [00:29:11] And I was also going to say that you might meet a business buyer who buys the business, and then they’re saying, “Hey. How does this work?” And you say, “Well, this is how we do it.” And they’re like, “Why do you do it that way? That doesn’t seem to make much sense.” And I don’t know if you ever get into some debate about that, but if you have a written process, there’s a credibility there. You have taken the time to write this down, and to vet it, and to make sure this is a good way of doing the work. Then, you have more credibility when you’re in that transition phase and less debate.

Ed Mysogland : [00:29:46] Well, it’s funny you say that, because there’s some guys that are buying up foundries and that’s their thing, that they are way into process and efficiency and retooling, for lack of a better word, an antiquated industry. I mean, they’re just killing it just because of that. I mean, there is just an antiquated way of doing things. And you start documenting that one work in one particular business, and you take that playbook and you put it on the next acquisition, you’re miles ahead and your ROI is happening so much quicker.

Ed Mysogland : [00:30:34] One of the things I would love to know, and I have no way of quantifying it, is the increase in value. In valuation, it’s more about earnings and risk. And so, when you look at a franchise, all things being equal, you’re buying a process. I have to believe that by doing something like this, you are buying the business owner’s process and that lowers the risk and that increases your value. Wouldn’t you agree? I think so.

Marie Mills: [00:31:22] Absolutely. Yeah, absolutely. And, again, let me talk a little bit more about the explicit benefits of doing this. And so, there are a lot of benefits. So, I was trying to narrow it down and make it easy to understand. So, the first thing is, when you document your processes, when you clarify them, you are creating a shared understanding in the business.

Marie Mills: [00:31:49] So, you don’t have opposing points of view of what you’re doing and how it’s supposed to get done. You get everybody on the same page and you create that transparency. So, like I had said before, the employees are more aware of what they’re doing, the managers are more aware of what the employees are doing. So, you have this shared understanding.

Marie Mills: [00:32:14] And so, I had this experience working with the business, and their business had to do with event planning. They had a long term employee, the salesperson, and she was great. Sales were coming in. There was no reason to question the process. But they wanted this documented because she was leaving the company.

Marie Mills: [00:32:37] And so, I went to talk to her and document it. It turns out, from the time they got the initial inquiry from a potential customer to when the deal was closed was about three months. And so, I wrote this down and got it all organized, reviewed it with the owners, and their jaws just dropped. “Three months? Three months to close a sale? We want that sale closed in three weeks.”

Marie Mills: [00:33:06] So, there you go. Now, you have a shared understanding when it’s written down. There’s not, like, an assumption of how it’s happening. You have the guidelines written up. This is how we want it to happen. So, that’s one main benefit.

Marie Mills: [00:33:22] The other we’ve talked about a little bit, what you’re kind of experiencing, the dependence or being overly dependent on a single employee. And that employee has knowledge that nobody else in the business knows. And this is a real risk. And sometimes you can figure out what they know pretty easily and sometimes you cannot. It depends on how complex. And that is a problem.

Marie Mills: [00:33:51] And my story there is about a company that did a lot of shipping. And then, somebody retires. And a few weeks later, the postage machine runs out of postage. And now you got three guys standing around the postage machine staring at it trying to figure it out. Because nobody knows how to refill the postage machine. Something really simple, right?

Marie Mills: [00:34:16] Often, it’s much more complicated than that. I mean, you probably can find that on the internet, but a lot of stuff you can’t. Either way, it’s a waste of time. It’s not a good deal.

Ed Mysogland : [00:34:31] A hundred percent. And it’s like you’re in our shop, because just a couple of days ago, I was trying to figure out how to print out the year-end postage by person who spent what. And I’m like, “Good, God. How do you do this?” And you’re right, I can’t tell you how much time I spent monkeying with that silly thing.

Marie Mills: [00:34:59] Because it’s rocket science, right? It’s just rocket science. And the thing is, people think, “Well, it’s so simple. I don’t have time to write it down.” But, actually, if you don’t know it, you don’t know it. It takes time to figure it out.

Ed Mysogland : [00:35:13] Yeah. And at the same time, you’re talking about employees, I’m looking at business owners too, what do you do. And we probably shouldn’t minimize their role because a lot of reasons the businesses don’t sell is because they believe that the business is the owner. So, if you can document the owner’s role, this is what I do every single day, there are certain duties that a business owner has on a regular basis, that, to me, will lessen the potential value penalty that the business owner may incur.

Marie Mills: [00:36:03] So, the funny thing, and I can hear the people talking, is, if these processes are so important to the business, why don’t I do this myself? I mean, why don’t I take the time? I mean, I know that they’re important. So, what advice do you have for those business owners that are listening to this going, “You know what? They actually have a point.” And they want to dip their toe into this world.

Marie Mills: [00:36:44] Yeah. Yeah. So, it is challenging for businesses to do this completely on their own. First of all, I hear this from pretty much every client I’ve ever had. They show up and they’re embarrassed, “I should have been able to do this myself. I should have been able to do it myself.” It’s very straightforward, but it’s not as easy as it looks.

Marie Mills: [00:37:07] And so, we’ve talked about not everybody is process-oriented, not everybody is really good at writing or organizing information. It takes time. People do not like doing it. Number one reason, “I hate writing processes.” I love writing processes that’s why I’m in this business. But most people don’t. And you don’t know where to start. You don’t know where to put it. So, guess what? You write a process. You put it out there. You can’t find it. You rewrite it. Now, you’ve got multiple versions. Now, what are you going to do?

Marie Mills: [00:37:44] So, it’s not just the documentation, it’s also there has to be a system for managing it. There has to be a system for managing it. It’s like a lot of things. It’s so beneficial when you do it, but it doesn’t make it any easier to do it.

Ed Mysogland : [00:38:03] Yeah. Go ahead. I’m sorry.

Marie Mills: [00:38:08] So, I was going to say, but I forgot the advice part. So, what’s the advice? The thing is, like we talked about, it’s not a one and done. It really needs to be a habit. And it needs to be a habit that’s integrated into doing your everyday work. And so, if you schedule, if you have each one of your people schedule some time out every single week, and all you get to do during that time is you work on your processes, even if you don’t make really fast headway, you’re now creating this habit. And it gets people thinking about, not just doing the work, but thinking about the work and starting to write it down.

Ed Mysogland : [00:38:53] Yeah. That part is really good. And from the standpoint, if I’m a business owner, I’m sitting here going, “When do I call Marie? Am I supposed to do this at myself and start here and then call her?” Do you start and you coach the whole process? How do you work?

Marie Mills: [00:39:27] Yeah. No, that’s great. So, I would say, if you have any questions, like, don’t hesitate to call. So, we’ll jump on a discovery call first. And the first thing I want to do is I want to make sure that the problem that you’re having really is process related. I actually have had somebody who wanted to hire me, and they’re like, “Yeah. This person is not doing the process.” And it’s like, “Well, do you have a process?” “Yes.” “Did you train them on it?” “Yes.” “They just don’t want to do it?” “Yes.” Okay. That’s not a process problem. That’s a performance problem.

Marie Mills: [00:39:59] So, now let’s clarify that the problem really is that you don’t have clear processes. And not that you have them, but people just aren’t using them. So, when I work with people, I can do all the writing. I can do some of the writing. I can coach you to do the writing. I can coach you through the whole process of writing your processes. So, every engagement is customized and it’s individual to your budget, and to what you need, and how willing and ready and interested you are in doing some of the work yourself.

Marie Mills: [00:40:34] And it can vary. It doesn’t have to be we decide that at the very beginning. We’ll decide like, let’s just jump in, document something together. Now, you get a sense. You want to write more, perfect. You don’t want to write more, perfect. I can work with any of that.

Ed Mysogland : [00:40:49] I got it. So, one of the questions we were talking about is how to overcome resistance when someone doesn’t want to adopt the new process. Because this is the way we’ve always done it. And aside from just the sheer embarrassment in doing this podcast and telling you all the things that are going wrong in my life, I could hear our staff going, “Well, this is the way we’ve always done it.” So, how do we overcome that?

Marie Mills: [00:41:25] Yeah. So, when there’s resistance, the first thing I always say is find out why. Because people always do things for a reason, even if they don’t think they do. They do it for a reason. Find out why they are resistant, what is behind it. If it is, in fact, it’s just we’ve always done it this way and I kind of am a lazy person and I don’t really want to change or whatever, that’s one thing. And a way to deal with that is, really, you got to get people thinking like this is best for the business. And if it’s good for the business, it’s going to be good for you ultimately.

Marie Mills: [00:42:00] So, we never want to ask you to do something just to do it a certain way just because or because that’s what I told you to do. There should be a good reason for why the process is being done a certain way. So, try to get them onboard by showing them that this is in their own benefit. This is in their own interests to work efficiently.

Marie Mills: [00:42:23] Now, let’s say that’s not the reason, but there’s some resistance. There’s some reason they’re not following the process – and I’ve had this happen. Again, you find out why. So, I had a fellow and he was working in H.R. and he was responsible for offboarding and terminating employees when they left the company, you know, terminating their access. And so, we had this process to make sure that the access was shut down, and it wasn’t happening.

Marie Mills: [00:42:52] And I went back to this guy and I said, “Are you following the process?” And he said, “Yeah.” I said, “Well, can I watch you?” “Okay.” And then, I watched him and I watched him skip a key step. So, he was shy to admit that he wasn’t following it. So, I got to find out what’s that about. And it turned out the way the process was written, he was sending an email to a manager and saying, “I need you to tell me what the termination date and time is.” Well, the manager and the manager’s worldview has better things to do with this time. So, he wasn’t replying.

Marie Mills: [00:43:33] And this is a cultural issue. This is like an internal cultural issue that you have to deal with. You’re not going to solve it with the process. So, I informed the right people and they can deal with that in their own way. But what I ended up doing is we rewrote the process so that he sends the email to the manager and he says, “If I do not hear from you by such and such date, I will assume the termination date and time is this and this.” Now, the responsibility is on the manager. And that worked much better with that particular dynamic in that particular culture. So, always find out first why they’re resistant to it.

Ed Mysogland : [00:44:15] Well, to be honest with you, I would foresee that or I would assume that there is a certain level of being threatened. Threatened that someone’s going to find out that there’s greater throughput, I could be doing more.

Marie Mills: [00:44:36] Yeah, yeah, yeah.

Ed Mysogland : [00:44:37] I could see that.

Marie Mills: [00:44:42] That’s more of a performance issue. And I mean, it is threatening. Even when there’s nothing bad to discover, it is a little bit unsettling to your employees when someone comes in. It takes a really confident employee for somebody to come in from the outside and say, “Hey, tell me everything you do. I’m going to write it down.” And then, we’ll all know that you said it and this is the way you work. And I think you just have to be very gentle with people and very supportive and make sure that everybody understands this is for the sake of efficiency and clarity.

Ed Mysogland : [00:45:17] Yeah. And I think that as a business, you have to probably have the communication and culture dynamics down. Because I was trying to formulate one of my last questions of, you know, from a timing standpoint, throwing this on somebody, I think, puts them in a defensive position. But if you work on the culture and communication and what are some of the problems, here’s a solution that, collectively, will benefit all of us if we can document our work. Because if someone leaves, “Oh, by the way, Joe, you’re the guy that’s going to backfill all of the responsibilities that the outgoing employee has.” Don’t you think?

Marie Mills: [00:46:14] Yeah. Right, it can happen. I mean, I think that you just have to be very transparent as to the reasons of why you’re doing this, and to really help the employee know. And I had a brilliant thought there, it flew away out of my head. And maybe it’ll come back, but maybe not. Okay. I know what I was going to say.

Marie Mills: [00:46:40] So, it does help. It does help. This is another reason why you might want to bring in somebody from the outside. I have worked with dynamics where the manager employee dynamic is not good. And you know what the manager will say? “I need to know what this person does and I don’t want to ask. It’s not going to go well if I ask.” They may not even tell me the whole thing. I want you to ask.

Marie Mills: [00:47:01] Now, the employee knows that I’ve been hired by the manager or by the owner. But if I approach it neutrally, which I’m always going to, because my job is to show up and to understand, it’s not to judge. That’s not going to happen when I’m working there. Now, employees are much more willing and able to open up and talk to me because I am a neutral person, and I am an interested person, and I’m not going to judge them.

Ed Mysogland : [00:47:30] I get it. Well, I appreciate you going a little over talking to me. And at the end of every episode, I always ask, what’s the one piece of advice that you could give listeners that would have the greatest impact on their business. For you, what would that be?

Marie Mills: [00:47:48] Well, I would say, don’t wait for your employees to give two weeks notice. Start now. Start next week. Don’t wait. Don’t wait.

Ed Mysogland : [00:47:56] You had to jam that to me, didn’t you?

Marie Mills: [00:47:58] I know you don’t want to hear it. That is the thing, though, don’t wait.

Ed Mysogland : [00:48:05] Okay. So, where can we find you? And you do work all across the country, right?

Marie Mills: [00:48:12] I work all across the country. I don’t know if I mentioned earlier, I do all my work on Zoom. I do not need to be onsite. I have a process that works virtually.

Ed Mysogland : [00:48:25] So, what’s the best way we can connect with you?

Marie Mills: [00:48:27] So, I have a website, clearsolutionsbymarie.com. I’m on LinkedIn. I would love to LinkedIn with anybody who wants to LinkedIn.

Ed Mysogland : [00:48:37] Well, we will have every way that someone can possibly get in touch with you on in the show notes, on the website, and on your favorite podcast player. So, Marie, there’s different businesses that you see that are niched, and I got to tell you, you have one fascinating business. And to be honest with you, how I wish I would have known you so much sooner than now. So, I appreciate your time. I thoroughly enjoyed our conversation.

Marie Mills: [00:49:16] Yeah. Me, too. Thank you so much for having me on your show.

Outro: [00:49:21] Thank you for joining us today on the How to Sell your Business Podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

Tagged With: Business Owners, business sale, Clear Solutions LLC, documentation, Ed Mysogland, Entrepreneurs, How to Sell a Business Podcast, Marie Mills, Operations, process documentation, processes, salable, valuation

How Divorce Impacts a Business Sale, with Melissa Gragg, Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC

January 31, 2023 by John Ray

Melissa Gragg
How to Sell a Business
How Divorce Impacts a Business Sale, with Melissa Gragg, Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Melissa Gragg

How Divorce Impacts a Business Sale, with Melissa Gragg, Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 9)

Certified Valuation Analyst Melissa Gragg, managing partner of Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC and host Ed Mysogland explore the complex issues that arise for the business when a business owner divorces. They address topics of navigating the emotions of the parties, disputes over the value, tips to prevent a deal from falling apart, the problem with buy/sell agreements, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC

Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC conducts business valuations for estate tax purposes, divorce litigation, partner disputes and mergers and acquisitions. Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC works to provide attorneys with a complete understanding of the financial issues in litigation cases involving breach of conduct, patent infringement, acts of fraud, asset misappropriation, breach of fiduciary responsibility and partnership disputes.

They have experience providing financial calculations for family law and personal injury cases as well as testimony in deposition and trial. Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC also serves as a subcontractor providing business valuations, lost profits calculations, lost wages calculations and forensic services to consultants including: accounting firms, investment banking firms, business valuation firms and sole practitioners involved in consulting.

Company website | LinkedIn | Twitter | YouTube

Melissa Gragg, CVA, MAFF, CDFA, Managing Partner, Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC

Melissa Gragg, CVA, MAFF, CDFA, Managing Partner, Bridge Valuation Partners, LLC

Melissa provides litigation support services and expert witness testimony for marital dissolution, owner disputes, commercial litigation, business interruption claims, personal damage calculations, lost profits and personal injury. She also conducts business valuations for purposes of estate planning as well as mergers and acquisitions.

  • Certified Valuation Analyst (CVA)

  • Certified Fraud Examiner (CFE)

  • Master Analyst in Financial Forensics – Matrimonial Litigation (MAFF)

  • Certified Divorce Financial Analyst (CDFA)

·    Possesses over 16 years of experience in providing valuation and consulting for companies ranging in size from large, publicly-traded firms to small, privately-held operations and family limited partnerships (FLPs)

·     Expertise performing valuations in numerous industries, including automotive/car dealerships, construction, electrical contracting, fast-food retail franchises, financial services, food and produce distributors, gas stations, hospitality services, healthcare (pharmacies, rural health clinics, nursing homes, doctors, dentists, orthodontists, chiropractors), insurance companies, industrial, landscaping, law firms, marketing research, nuclear power plant, payroll services, plastics (injection molding, thermoforming, packaging), printing and imaging, specialty retail, restaurants, technology, trucking and website developers.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Introduction: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business podcast where every week we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:35] In this podcast, I had the opportunity to visit with Melissa Gragg. And for those of you who have either been divorced, know somebody that got divorced that owns a business or is thinking about getting a divorce, this episode’s for you.

Melissa is just dynamite. She has been in this world of disputes and complex valuation matters for years. I’ve followed her career. She writes an awful lot about the topic. And just a few things about her. You know, she’s a certified valuation analyst. She’s a certified fraud examiner. She’s a master analyst in forensic, financial forensics specializing in matrimonial litigation. And finally, she’s a certified divorce financial analyst. And in our time together, there was no shortage of tips about these complex matters where there’s emotions involved and what is fair may not necessarily be equal. So, I hope you enjoy my conversation with Melissa Gragg.

I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. On this podcast, I interview buyers, sellers, dealmakers, and other professional advisors about what creates value in a business and how that business can effectively be sold at a premium value. On today’s show, I am so stoked. I have Melissa Gragg of Bridge Valuation Partners and The Valuation podcast. I came to know her years ago. She’s going to give me grief about it, but she was a prolific author. And I read about her in the Trade Magazines, and she was always that person for divorce and complex issues. And I just enjoy reading about her. And at some point, I was going to get her on the podcast, and I finally have done it. And this is round two because I screwed up the technology the first time. So, Melissa, welcome to round two.

Melissa Gragg: [00:02:51] Thank you. So good to be here, again.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:54] Right. So, before we get started, I kind of gave an overview about just your background, but you know, can you talk a little bit about how Bridge Valuation Partners came to be, as well as your own podcast?

Melissa Gragg: [00:03:13] Yeah, sure. I mean, Bridge Valuation Partners, I kind of had to come up with a name at some point because we all start with a company working for others and then we create our own company. And I was like, well, what do I really do? I kind of am the bridge between two people that are disagreeing, whether they’re a couple or a business owner, and things like that. And so, most of my practice has been around litigated matters or when people are fighting. And I started to realize that if I could work for both of them, it was a little bit easier because being impartial in the middle is easier when you work for both sides. So, I kind of have been doing a lot of joint work or working as a joint expert and then doing mediation, which is kind of like doing the same thing just outside of court.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:07] Well, let’s start with divorce. In my world, that is the kiss of death. I mean, it is if someone shows up and says, I want to sell my business because I’m getting divorced, I know that it is guaranteed to be a mess. And chances are it’s never going to sell because somebody is not going to be happy. So, I guess that’s kind of where I wanted to start, was if that’s the decision, whether it’s one party or the other, let’s go ahead and sell, I mean how do you manage that process when both parties, you know, it’s an emotionally charged event? And how can you help somebody through that process? Because I can tell you, we’ve been — I don’t want to say we do a pretty good job of it, but it still breaks down and for no apparent reason other than I’m pissed at the other party. You know what I mean?

Melissa Gragg: [00:05:14] Right. Right. Well, I mean, I think you have a lot of factors. One is traditionally in every state is different, but traditionally, in a divorce setting, if one party wants to keep the business and maybe the other party doesn’t, then we’re going to value it. Right. And one party is going to keep it and the other is going to get equivalent assets. So, then you have a situation where maybe they can’t agree to the price and now you have well, you buy it. No, you buy it. Maybe it’s a passive interest, right? Maybe we’re just a 10 percent owner in something and we don’t want to split it, or it can’t be split.

So, then you have a situation where is the judge forcing the sale? And the judge could say, well, if you guys can’t agree to it, then we’re going to have kind of a liquidation, if you will. And now, we switch over into the M&A world. Well, in the M&A world, what do we want to do? We want to prep for the sale. We want to get our client in the best light possible. And you are literally starting with, we’re getting divorced, we’re selling the company. And so, you’re in a fire sale. A perception to the buyer, I think is part of the bigger issue. And then you have the distracted owner.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:32] You know, one of the most — we took it on the chin on this divorce because but at the same time, I was kind of impressed that they did it this way. So, the parties couldn’t agree to value so they put it on the market. And I’ll bet you, it was a great business and we had ten plus offers in a real short period of time. And we got down to the person that they were going to sell to, and the wife bought him out. She used that offer as proxy for fair market value, which to me I mean like I said, it forced me to change my engagement agreement from that point forward. But at the same time, we were pretty impressed that what a great way to, you know, if you can’t resolve who’s going to pay what, all right, you put it on the market. The market will tell you what the value is. And that’s my next question is the difference between fair market value in a divorce setting versus what I just described.

Melissa Gragg: [00:07:42] Well, and what you just described is when somebody is getting divorced, if it’s their first time, they don’t know what to do. A lot of the attorneys are kind of like giving advice on what to do. So, when we have a house, we’re like, oh, call an appraiser, get an idea. Just get a rough estimate of what it’s going to cost. And that might cost a couple hundred bucks to get an appraiser to tell you value your house. Now they say, oh, well, you know, there’s these business brokers, these appraisers, like go out and get an idea for them. So absolutely it has been used as a ploy to determine what the fair market value is.

Now, realistically in valuation, any type of merger is going to have some inkling of a strategic value. And so, when you have a strategic value, it’s that I know something about the market that makes me smarter and or I think I’m getting a deal because you’re going through the divorce or whatever the reasons are they might come up with it. Fair market value is willing buyer, willing seller. And that’s usually one of the edicts for a divorce, is that it just has to be you can’t pay a premium or you can’t get a premium for it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:56] Well, that’s what tripped me up. Why not in a million years did I think that we were — that at the end of the day, this is how it was going to work, because I figured somebody would put their hand up and say, this isn’t fair market value. This is something other than that. And it didn’t. And I mean, the judge was tickled pink that, you know, I mean you can’t argue about it.

Melissa Gragg: [00:09:20] The problem is judges, attorneys, everybody in divorce court, when you even describe fair market value and you’re like willing buyer, willing seller, the first thing they say is like, we’re not selling, we’re not selling, we’re not going to market. This isn’t how we should look at it, like it’s all me. You can’t sell me and all of these things which fair market value is the hypothetical. Like it is the assumption that you’re going to put it on the market and what would somebody pay for the cash flow?

And so, I think in in some capacity, when you have an unwilling business owner that is willing to sell out, but maybe not internally because again, you’re never going to know the true value if you’re just a warring couple or warring partners. Like you’re always going to assume that you’re getting screwed over. So, an outside buyer comes in and offers that price. The judge is going to love that because they’re going to say, well, somebody on the outside was willing to pay that and you now paid it. So that person got what it was worth. And they think that that is absolutely the proxy. And even if you have a conversation of, well, we had five buyers and we worked up the price and it’s now a 20 percent premium, quite frankly, then they would probably turn around and say, okay, well, are you willing, sir, to buy your wife’s shares out?

Now, to me, if the wife comes in and buys it at that point, then there was still an implicit understanding that it was worth more. And so now, you’re arguing against a kind of an assumption that’s probably erroneous. But like we’ve talked about this before, they’re locking in on that number and nothing even a willing buyer out in the open field offering to buy this, if they still think that it’s worth more. You know, like right now in divorce, the attachment to property is a big deal. So, the attachment to a business that’s maybe been in the family, or you have children that are working in the business, you have more complexity. Normally, these businesses provide the lifestyle for everyone involved. So, you can’t get rid of the business because then we don’t have an income. And if we don’t have an income, we can’t pay alimony and we can’t pay for the houses. So, it’s kind of a catch 22.

Ed Mysogland: [00:11:44] Play that out. So, what do you do? I mean, that wasn’t where I was going, but I’m interested in what in the world do you do when you have that level of complexity in a family business that the income stream is the source of income for a bunch of family members? Yeah. How do you do that?

Melissa Gragg: [00:12:05] Well, I mean, one is can it continue? And because once we start to take a look from a business valuation standpoint, we start to see some of the nuances, like we have to dial back some of those expenses to understand what the true cash flow is. But in those situations, when it’s providing for the family, a lot of times, I mean quite frankly those are the situations when you have a privately held company, majority owned by one person, right, the father, the grandfather, the mother, the grandmother, whatever, that hierarchy, and you have all these kids. Well, both spouses have an interest to have the kids still employed. But now you’re looking at, most of the time the other spouse is concerned that a lot of personal expenses are being run through the business.

And so, you have this kind of this thing of like, well, we want to dig deeper. Almost always there’s some issue of what has been done from an accounting standpoint, but it’s never in the best interest for the parties to go down that path of like threatening, well, I’m going to call somebody and you’re going to get in trouble for doing these things, putting personal expenses on your business. It’s really starting to educate them on the fact of that sometimes one income stream was great for one household, but it wasn’t great for two. And so, in looking at it, you don’t want to blow it up, right, because it’s still going to be funneling through one party to the other.

But then it becomes, is it rehabilitative, you know, like maintenance, paying somebody should get them to another spot, but that’s not always what it’s used for. So, it becomes a very difficult situation. But you don’t want to like throw the baby out with the bathwater. Like you don’t want to call the IRS or call the Feds to come in because my husband’s doing something or my wife’s doing something when it will crater the entire thing. It’s better to kind of come in and say that there’s a lot of discretionary items that should be done differently.

And as evaluators, we’re not coming in to say that the taxes were done incorrectly, right? We’re making the assumption that they were done properly with the CPA. So, if you have a business owner that does their own taxes, it’s a little bit different. You have to do your own professional due diligence and say, does it make sense? I mean, we had one just yesterday. We presented it. And they were very concerned. And it was based in an industry that has so much fraud in it. So, the odds are there’s something going on. But when we compared it to the bank statements and the tax returns and the financials, guess what, they weren’t too far off. Because the reality is most people aren’t criminals, they’re just trying to like get away with a little bit.

Ed Mysogland: [00:15:06] Yeah, minimize taxes.

Melissa Gragg: [00:15:07] Back it out in the valuation. Yup. Can we look at what it looks like without it? Yup. And that’s really how we approach it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:15:14] And then how do the parties feel about that? Because now, you’re a little bit different, like because you’re hired by both parties to mediate a value. So, your findings are, look, they are what they are. I don’t represent either one of you or I represent both of you. And here’s where it lands. But I guess as you start uncovering the discretionary expenses or you start uncovering getting the business down to truly what you’re valuing. And I mean, how is your level of scrutiny felt by the parties? Is it good or bad? I would imagine it’s good. At least somebody knows that this is going on well. At least one party does, you know.

Melissa Gragg: [00:16:08] Yeah. And I’m not always hired for both parties, but I think you have to operate in this space as if you are always are hired by both parties. Like really looking at it from a neutral standpoint. But then in kind of taking that one step further, if I’m working for both parties and I’m in the middle, I literally am telling them like everybody has their mediation spiel at the beginning. I’m telling them crazy stuff. Like everybody else wants to say, talk nice and be nice. And I’m like, no, I’m there to protect you from yourself and from everybody else in the room. And I’m there to provide education on the value and there’s always going to be gray.

So, in a lot of times, I have to bring the gray up. Like, oh, parties, are you aware, since this is a business owned by one spouse, about the double dip? And they’re like, no, I don’t know about the double dip. And I’m like, well, the double dip is, we can only have income be either salary or profit. And they’re like, okay, well, tell me more. And we talk about that. Well, of course, some of these things are on the side of one party or the other. But if I say it to everybody involved and I say, here are the positives and negatives, and I create it as a situation that we just talk about, it diffuses it.

And if there is an issue, if you spent $1,000, let’s say $10,000, make it good, $10,000 at a jeweler. And I ask what was bought and it was not to your wife, it still is. You control the vibe and the energy of the room. And so, if I’m like, well, what is this $10,000? Did you buy a diamond? Or if I’m just like, it looks like there was $10,000 to Diamond Company, is everybody aware of what was purchased? And one person might say no. And I’ll say, okay, what was purchased? Was it for business purposes? And then it will typically, if there’s infidelity, it’s already known. And we’re quantifying it to say, okay, you spent $10,000 on the paramour. But the thing is, most people use their bank account for multiple expenditures, but the tax accountant is allocating it out and saying this is to the business and this is to you personally. But the spouse doesn’t know that process and doesn’t see that process.

And so, I’m like, yeah, I know he’s using the card, but it’s still the accountant is not putting that as an expense. So, some of it’s education, some of it’s identifying the issues when we have inheritances involved or settlements from suits that’s going to have a little bit more houses, have a little bit more energy. More than houses, vacation homes, because vacation homes are where we went when we were happy as a family. And we want to continue to be happy as a family, even if it’s without that one spouse. So, I’ve seen vacation homes become more of like both parties can use them. But you need to identify where the emotion is going to be because when you mix emotion and numbers, they don’t match. You have to deal with the numbers in a very different way than you have to deal with the emotions. So, when the numbers are tied to the emotion, if you don’t know that going in, how do you back down off of that emotion?

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:52] So in a sale environment, I mean what’s the tip or what’s the tell that things are going to go awry. So, if I’m getting divorced, I want to know, people that are listening, what am I looking for, or how do I know this path? What’s going to happen to me? Or what is the scrutiny? Is this really the colonoscopy I’m told it’s going to be? That kind of thing.

Melissa Gragg: [00:20:28] If you’re the broker, if you’re the M&A advisor and somebody is going through a divorce, you have to be very clear. I would almost get both parties in the room and have the discussion like this is the process. We’re going to get offers, because if you can in the room zoom, however you do it at this point. But if you can lay eyes on that out spouse, the spouse that’s not part of it, and everybody is saying, yes, we are selling this company. If that person is sitting back and being like, well, like how much? Like what is it going to entail? Those are going to be your signs that that’s going to, like if you don’t answer those questions now, eventually that’s almost like your second seller, right? So, you get everything.

So, your first seller is the person that’s totally making the decisions and yet they still have the second seller in the back that could trump everything. So, unless you know the relationship and you’ve put eyes on it because guess what? In a divorce, there’s three stories. Wife, husband, husband, husband, wife, wife. However, you want to look at, there’s two sides, and then there’s the truth. And the problem is, if you don’t put eyes on that situation and it’s acrimonious or it’s okay or they are not aligned, I would almost step back from the situation because you’re just punting that issue until you get closer to a close date and then it’s going to just ruin it at that point. So, I think you’ve got to get both. And who’s making the decision? Like if the court has determined that it’s going to be sold, then there is a written court order for the sale of that company. And so, then you’re working. Now, can somebody break it? Sure, they’re people.

Ed Mysogland: [00:22:16] Well, the funny thing is most of the blowups in recent memory has been once we get an offer and we start moving down that path of this is, you know, how much we’re getting, what’s the promissory note? If there’s a bank involved, is there sub debt? And the prospect of I’m going to have to defer part of my purchase price with this guy I’m trying to totally divest myself of, you know, it hasn’t gone well. And again, as well as due diligence.

Due diligence is another thing, especially if you’ve got husband and wife that have been working in the business and now buyer has to rely on them collectively to provide whether it’s a quality of earnings or whether it’s just your normal due diligence. It is a total pain and that’s where it falls apart. So, I guess that’s where my next question is, you know, now you know where it is, what do you do? I mean, have you seen anything effective that would help me not allow the, I shouldn’t say not allow, how to prevent the deal from blowing up once we agree on purchase price? We’re only about 30 percent of the way there. now we’ve got to verify.

Melissa Gragg: [00:23:51] I think you have to frontload it. So, I think you have to frontload all the work. But the thing that somebody says when they’re in a divorce and when they’re selling their company is the same, it’s my second job. And so, when you’re in a divorce selling your company and running a company, you now have three jobs. And the problem is three jobs is going to stress out anybody, but then you have a divorce which is highly emotional. And then, quite frankly, we are discounting the fact that selling your baby, I mean, your company is highly emotional.

So, when you combine those three, you either have to lower your expectation for quickness and that’s never a good thing in a deal. Right? Like we can’t just like, oh, you have due diligence requests, we’ll get back to you next month. That’s the close. Like you don’t have that space. So, in my mind, if I see somebody that’s in a divorce and every end, like we’re going to talk about all the issues at the beginning, all the negotiations, we’re going to have everything ready for due diligence before it’s even requested. And just be prepared for that capability because I don’t want to disclose it to the buyers of like, oh, you know, like will you be patient with my client because they’re going through a divorce. Like, they don’t care. They see blood and they’re just going to go for you and they’re going to be like, oh, fine, yeah, we’ll give you more time. We’re going to ding you on the price too.

So, in my mind, it’s really having, like everything I think is setting the expectation. And so, if you set the expectation with the couple and you’re like, I don’t know if this is going to be a good time or not or who is the front person, like what things do we have to agree with and what things that we don’t? Because the moment you continue to leave out a spouse, especially gender related, that spouse is not your gender, right, so you keep on leaving out the wife, you’re going to be the bad guy, he’s going to be the bad guy. And it’s going to be a perceived not disclosing the information. You could be giving them everything but the perception.

And so, I think when you get involved in these like people don’t like divorce because half of it’s on perception. There’s no logic about it. There’s no real thing happening. It’s just the perception like, oh, you didn’t have a conversation with, I’m the owner too. And as a woman, we are constantly put to the side in those situations, especially when it’s male advisors. And so, I think that in anything you have to do your own due diligence, the way I do mediations or when I work for a joint party, we have very clear communication. You do not get to talk to me without me responding with your original email. So, if you email me and say I hate this person and the value should be this, I’m going to say thank you for your email. And I’m going to respond to everyone, your spouse, the advisor, everyone. And I’m going to say, I’m going to clarify the situation. And so, in my mind, that keeps me away from having any confidential discussions. Now, I can tell you how we use confidential discussions, but for those from the very beginning until I get the trust of everyone, everything has to be communicated to the whole.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:15] Well, I’ll tell you, one of the things that you just said was I think really impactful is front loading. That if you’re going to go through a divorce, you need to prepare much more. The normal data room is not adequate. You need a full due diligence uploaded and ready to go because I think the shorter the time from offer to close, even though that’s best practice anyway, in that case you have to do it. That was really great.

Melissa Gragg: [00:27:59] But realistically in a divorce, the discovery process is very extensive. So, in some capacity, if you’re selling after you’re getting divorced, in the divorce is a lot of the documents. Now, if you’re selling and then getting divorced, it’s the vice versa. Like you have all the documents. And in those cases, if you are not hiding the ball, if you are not trying to keep documents away from your spouse, it doesn’t even make sense. Like you are a couple, your money comes from one pot and yet you’re going to take your money and pay two different people to value the same thing. And they’re guaranteed going to come up with different numbers for sure, going to come up with different numbers. And then you’re just going to pay them to fight. And nobody else in the room even knows what they’re talking about.

So, I think that the documents might be there, but they may not be. I mean you’re not going to be ready for equality of earnings. You’re going to have it. And for the most part, I think business brokers and M&A advisors, we know what is going to be needed. And so, from my standpoint, if you see kind of slow times in the process from the divorce standpoint or whatever, because like divorces could take a year or two.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:16] I get it.

Melissa Gragg: [00:29:16] You might sell a company and still be getting divorced. So, I think you just have to know where you’re at in the process. And then the additional pieces, is this business cyclical? Because if this business is cyclical and we’re heading into Christmas season and that’s their time, you all just have to stop. Like at some point, you just have to be like, this is not going to work. Because if you start to crater the business owner like and with mental health at an all-time high issue, it could be more impactful. So, I just think that having them understand that each of these takes time and a process and that hey, you have the time now, get the documents now, let’s answer the questions. I mean, even doing preliminary valuations, I tell people it’s going to help you know the answers that you have no clue. Like what happened to that expense? I just asked a client, what is this $700,000 other income?

Ed Mysogland: [00:30:21] What was it?

Melissa Gragg: [00:30:22] Like it’s not like $7. It’s like $700. And you know what he said to me? And I said, it was last year, last year, like, we’re right there. Right. And he’s like, really? I wonder how that could be. And I was like, do you think your accountant knows? Oh, yeah, I’m sure she knows. Wait, wait, it could have been literally he named four different things that it could be. So, you have to understand the level of business of what you’re, like does the owner have a hand on every single thing? Or is the owner — I mean because the companies that are selling are $25, $50 million, right? These owners are not doing everything.

And so, they don’t know the answer, but they’re sitting in the room negotiating these. Like you’re negotiating these prices with them. And then they ask one question of like, well, where’s that $700,000 of other income? And you’re like, hey, guy, what’s that 700? And he’s like, oh, it could have been a lot of things. Is it recurring? Is it going to happen again? I don’t know. I don’t know. So, I think that a lot of it’s your due diligence so that you can conduct it without the owner there. And most of the time, we want to conduct all of this with the owner.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:33] Yeah, no, no.

Melissa Gragg: [00:31:34] But there are going to be times where they’re just going to disappear because they’re going to be so overwhelmed by all of this.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:40] Yeah, I follow. Well, I want to conclude the story of the woman I told you that used us for fair market value. And her husband was just, I mean just that kind of guy, good for her for getting divorced kind of guy. And she turned it and flipped it. She bought it and flipped it. And I’ll bet you, she made — it wasn’t times two, but it was a good one and a half times, and it was within months. She knew exactly what she was doing. And I loved it because, like I said, it was you don’t wish divorce on anybody, but, boy, you know, this guy was just not, it was a good situation.

Melissa Gragg: [00:32:29] So, I think the hardest issue in divorce valuation in general is that when we’re doing strategic value, when we’re looking at investors, when we’re working for the company, right, and talking about how to grow it, sell it, buy it, whatever, we’re looking at really like what is the potential, right? And we’re kind of ignoring the probability that that’s going to happen because we’re speculating. And quite frankly, even sometimes when I get into these businesses, I was like, yeah, I see it. I see the future. It is bright, it’s going to be beautiful, but it hasn’t happened.

And like, as much as I believe that it could happen, in a divorce we are looking at what has happened, because in some courts they think that a future or a projection or a DCF, a discounted cash flow model is future projections and its future value. Right. And sometimes, we can’t explain that away because they’re just like, no, you’re not. And in divorce, you’re sometimes not entitled to future value. You’re entitled to what this value is today. And so, I think in that capacity, it’s hard because you get in these situations and you feel and you hear the impassioned business owner and they always think that their business is worth more, way more money until they get divorced and then it’s worth nothing, you know. So, you always have that issue.

But for me, it’s kind of getting out of the speculation and the belief that it is going to happen because these people are usually brilliant and they’re coming up with great ideas and they may have a lot of cash flow that’s coming in or investors, but we can’t speculate. Like if you haven’t proved it, and that’s the hard part. Like somebody could say, oh, okay, you’re going to go sell this business for $1 million. I got somebody who’s willing to pay $2 million. Why? Because I sold them on the dream, right? It’s still the same business, but I was able to create a vision that they bought into better than you. Okay. But either way, even if they walked away and that spouse bought it from you, like she probably needed to still pay the deal fees, right?

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:47] No. That’s my point. No, no. That was the whole point. She was excluded from our agreement. It was third party. That’s why I said we changed all of our agreements. If that changes hands from a family member, we’re getting paid. And in this case, it was an intercompany sale. So, yeah, we took it on the chin on that one. But like I said, you know, we paid the tuition and that’s okay. It hasn’t ever happened again.

So, the remaining time that we have, I wanted to talk to you about the work you’re doing with selling companies, because regardless of who you use or how you get your business sold, ultimately the goal is to have a successful exit. And the model that, what you’ve taken as far as the mediation process and applied it to selling a company, to me I think that is fascinating and truly a great way to exit a business. So, can you talk a little bit about your process and the evolution of it I guess to begin with and then how you do that and what has been most effective on, you know, as far as the exit?

Melissa Gragg: [00:36:12] I think lately I’ve seen more partnerships either buying in or buying out. And most of it’s because we either got money sitting on the side or we need the money, right? And so, somebody will come to me and they will say, hey, I got a person, they’re thinking maybe they’re employee, maybe they’re an outside, they want to buy the company. And I need to know what it’s worth because we need to start these negotiations. And then I say, great. And usually, it’s the business owner, right? And sometimes it’s the person buying in. I’m going to buy into this company, can you tell me if it’s going to be worth it?

A lot of times, I’m telling them like, you don’t need a valuation report. Like you need numbers run and depending upon your credential, you can either run those numbers and give a smaller piece of paper or not, but you have to understand your own standards. But it’s really, though, because what I tell them is I can give you a number, I can look at the business, and I can give you the number. And that’s going to be the starting point of the negotiation.

And whatever number you tell them, depending upon what side you are, is either where you start and you’re going to pay more, or you are going to get less. But either way, you have to determine where that starting point is. And I say, a way to do this if we don’t start right now is you go back to that person, that partner, and you say, hey, do you want to do it together? You split the fees or in some cases, if it’s you’re buying out a partner, it’s the company. And I come in and I do the same thing. It’s the communication has to be clear, communication with all parties.

And we go in and we look, and I get them to all sign off on the history, the adjustments. I still do the math, but I’m like, hey, does this adjusted EBITDA make sense? Does this projection make sense? And they come back, and they argue the inputs, the assumptions basically. They’re like, oh, I think it’s going to be growing faster. Well, now you think a 3 percent growth rate. He thinks a 15 percent growth rate. I think I have an industry report that says seven, but I show you what seven and ten looks like. And eventually, I will offer them, so we negotiate.

And then at some point I say, okay, are we good on the numbers? Like you understand what I’m saying as the cash flow going forward if you’re doing capitalization of earnings? They say yes. And I say, okay, boop, here’s the value. And they’re like — and they should be, each of them should be moderately okay and moderately, that they’re going to like sit there and be like, are you okay with it because, wait, because they don’t want to get screwed. You just don’t want to get screwed in this situation. But what happens is I’m defending the number, not them. So, they can still remain friends because I’m the enemy and I’m the enemy to both of them, because one of them wants it higher and one of them wants it lower.

So, they’re going to come at me from both sides. But what they’re not having conversations with is each other. Because if you negotiate just two people, you made up your numbers. And if you made up your numbers, I just don’t like yours and you don’t like mine and there’s no basis for them. So, now we’re in this tit for tat and we’re not probably going to be happy after it because you’re both going to feel screwed. And so, in doing this in the middle, we show the number and then I say, hey, you each get an hour with me by yourself. And they’re like, what? And I’m like, yeah, so we’re going to take these models or templates. And we’ve done this with family members of four different parties warring. Everybody gets an hour and we use the models and the templates to run your numbers.

So, you thought it was a 3 percent growth rate. You thought that we would have to get debt. You thought that that was a bad ad back. Whatever it was that you just didn’t like, I get to show you what the number means now. Sometimes I do it with both of them there and say, oh, you wanted these things. The value is now it’s not a million anymore, it’s $990,000. And then I go over to this guy, and I say, you know, you wanted this and the value is $1.1 million. And so, and maybe it’s $1.2, right? So, it’s a little bit down on this guy, but a little bit more up on this one.

Now, I’ve established the range that you guys negotiate and then I tell them now the value is one issue. We have to negotiate employment contracts, earn outs, buyouts, the timing for the buyout. So, now you’re arguing the facilitation of the buyout as opposed to the number of the buyout, right? And that’s where it kind of changes. And quite frankly, if you’re buying in, this is a bigger deal because now you’re going to buy — you now have an unequal distribution of power. And unless I level the playing field from a power standpoint, the person that doesn’t have control over it is always going to think I am in the corner of the businessperson.

Ed Mysogland: [00:41:16] So doesn’t the business owner, in their operating agreement or bylaws, isn’t there something that governs people buying in? And do you kick that to the curb and say, you know what, I get it, but this is how we’re going to do it? Or better yet, Mr. Owner, this is what we’re going to have to supersede this agreement in order to get that party into this business if you truly want him as him or her as an investor, how does that work?

Melissa Gragg: [00:41:48] I will say a buy sell agreement. I haven’t seen one written properly or well. And I think a lot of people go and try to help people come up with better buy sells so that they can avoid this. I will tell you for the most part, and I can’t say all the way and I can’t say every state, for the most part when I’ve been involved in litigation where there was a very specific buy sell, almost specific enough to say we determine the EBITDA based on this, this is the multiple, blah, blah, blah, and there’s some room to allow the valuation, the court throws it out.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:26] Really? Why?

Melissa Gragg: [00:42:27] I have very rarely seen a buy sell with upheld. One is because most of the things that they say is going to happen in the buy sell that they’ve covered is not what is happening. And then the divorce is kind of different. So, if the divorce says, oh, it’s going to be book value, yeah, that’s not an equitable situation. So, the court could just say that’s not equitable, that’s not fair. And then I come in anyway. And so, for the most part, and I think that where we went wrong as we figured out a long time ago that we would negotiate from a position that we make up. And I am finding that if we negotiate from some solid numbers with some decent multiples and decent cash flow, because the reality is, what am I buying? Am I buying $500,000 of cash flow? Am I buying $100,000 of cash flow? And if I can’t get to that point where we all agree to it, why am I buying into it?

So, it’s really going to uncover how do they — and I will tell both of them, I said, how you deal with this is a very good indication of how you deal with this going forward and all issues that you’re going to talk to about being two owners. And so, it just started as a thing that I just did a couple of times, and then it became like, I value the company every year for whoever buys in and buys out. Quite frankly, I believe that if you want to lock in a buy sell, you need to value the company every single year. And that value becomes the value that anybody over the next year can buy in or buy out for.

And then it’s been determined. It’s a consistent process. You have a pattern. To me, in any of this, especially if you’re going to continue to buy in and buy out like an ESOP, any sort of employee, like employees buying in and out because that’s how the boomers and everybody is going to exit, right? There has to be like, you can’t just be bought out sometimes. Like sometimes there’s going to be family members and things like that. It’s going to be a transition period, but you’re going to be working. Even if somebody comes in and buys your company out totally, one to three years you’re going to be working with them.

So, if you hate them on day one, this is not the endeavor that you want to go about. And you’re hating them because they didn’t like your number, but your number was pulled from the sky. And it’s what you felt it was worth, but I try to encourage people to have solid foundation to negotiate because there’s always ways to give. Like if I come in and I do the valuation right, and I’ve done it for so many families. And that’s where it becomes key.

Niece is buying out of business, right? I’m coming in and trying to save those relationships from the negotiation process. But if I don’t have some support for that position, now if I come in and say this is worth a million and you really want to sell it to them for $800,000, there’s nothing that prevents you from doing that. I’m just giving you a rubric or a container of here’s the reasonable value. If you decide to go outside of the reasonable value, what do we know in mergers and acquisitions? You can go outside any you want. Maybe that niece is like, no, no, auntie, I want to make sure you get at $1.5 million. Okay, but I want you to continue to work.

Again, we were solving situations with a number that we just thought everybody would seal on, and they’re not. There’s no number. That’s the hard part for people to understand. Even if I do this for a living and I come up with numbers for four companies, there really is no number. There’s a range of reasonable value. Hopefully, both experts, or multiple experts would all be in that range, but there’s a range of reasonable value and then there’s negotiating the intricacies of the deal. So I might take $800,000 because I want a two year salary.

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:44] So in your practice, one of the things, I mean you’re able to facilitate exits and not just with family members. And in our original conversation, you’re dealing with people that have received indications of interest and actually helping those two, I don’t say merge, but there’s an exit. But you’re right in the middle of it. I don’t want to say — I mean you’re a value broker is I think the term I used before. I mean, you’re right in the middle of brokering that value. So, you know —

Melissa Gragg: [00:47:25] I think business brokers and M&A advisors, because I was in that field, right, that’s where I started. We were always trying to get these great companies to sell or buy. The good companies, EBITDA of $1 million or more, $5 million. And the reality is I’m valuing companies every year just for strategic planning. And what I am seeing, and this is post pandemic, this was not pre-pandemic, this is post-pandemic, this is very much business owners that are 55, 65, 75, I am seeing so much money in the hands of private equity and big companies that they are just coming to my client’s door and knocking on the door. And they’re like, Hey guys, are you for sale? And my clients like no. And they’re like, how about name your price. And then they’re like, name my price?

Okay. So, then they come back to me and they’re like, hey, somebody wants to name their price. I know we were worth a million dollars at the year end, but do you think we can get three? And I’m like, I don’t know. Let’s take a look at it. So, it’s negotiating that purchase price up. But what I say, so I come in there and I say, hey, can you go hire my guy, Ed, because he’s going to help you like make sure you get the right. And you know what the owners say, why would I bring in Ed? Like, I can do this. And you know what the buyer says? Why are you bringing in Ed? We want to screw the seller over. Don’t bring in Ed. Ed’s going to protect them.

And so, we’re going in this interesting space where business owners are doing their own deals, regardless of what you say. And so, and I’m like I got people that won’t charge you on the deal fee. Like they’ll just charge you by the hour. Now, they’re like, I got you. Can we just use you? And I’m like, What? But the reality is they’re getting it done and some of the buyers and sellers just want to do this business owner to business owners. So, they’re not — like sometimes it’s an unsophisticated buyer. I had an unsophisticated buyer and seller where literally they were both like, okay, Melissa so should we both just hire the same attorney? Like, who should we hire to do that? And that, quite frankly, after being in a lot of deals that were really bad or went wrong or had post litigation after the deal, like one of my deals literally within a month, they already had an issue, right, because of some stuff.

Ed Mysogland: [00:50:00] Totally. Yeah, stuff.

Melissa Gragg: [00:50:01] That’s what’s happening. And it’s interesting to me because these are the clients I always wanted when I would go to M&A, right. And I could never get them because they were kind of untouchable because they had so many advisors around them. But the reality is this valuation is kind of the carrot and they want to know because they want to negotiate themselves. And then when they’re not good at it, they need us to help them, in the wings though. Half the time, I’m helping them but not a leader.

Ed Mysogland: [00:50:36] Yeah. I’ll tell you. And in our shop, I mean, I can tell you with certainty, if you do valuation work, I mean digging in, not necessarily a full blown report, but digging in and understanding the value and understanding how the buyer is going to look at. You got 87 percent of the time, your business sells. I mean, that’s a huge number. And at the same time, I wish and I think I’m going to, just because you said it, I’m going to start keeping track of our profit center of unscrewing up people’s original work, not value work, but negotiation work. And just what you describe, hey, I’ve got a buyer or I’ve got multiple buyers. You know, I get these letters every day and now what? Well, you know, I got this far and you know, the —

Melissa Gragg: [00:51:33] And I told my guys I was like, if you get calls every week, write down the names.

Ed Mysogland: [00:51:37] Right.

Melissa Gragg: [00:51:38] Write down the names. Just write down. Like that’s our short list of if we did want to do. Because what I see is when really profitable companies go to sell, there’s usually an event, a health event, a situation that happens that makes it be like, okay, we got to sell in six months. And the reality is when the person comes knocking, if you are ready and if you know the worth, your worth, right, then you’re in a better situation. If you also, you know, it’s not like, oh, doing a valuation makes you better prepared. No, doing a valuation or having some consistent advisors in general, they’re going to be like, hey, why are you doing that? Oh, that’s not good. Don’t do that. Stop. Get an accountant. Clean up the books.

And so, when they come, quite frankly, if somebody does a quality of earnings on one of my deals, it should go smooth because we already knew, you know, or even like we talked about this, we’ll negotiate the holdback. Like I will negotiate the whole back at the LOI stage and they’re like, why are you negotiating this? And I was like, Because you’re going to come back and ding me on it at the end. Like, let’s talk about everything right now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:52:51] It’s funny you say it because I was just squabbling with another deal person and they were like, you got to be kidding me. Well, I told you I had Elliot Holland from Guardian Due Diligence on the podcast a couple of weeks ago. And I was saying, boy, if you could just show up to a buyer, show a buyer here’s where the quality of earnings, wouldn’t it make the whole process go infinitely easier? And the opposing viewpoint was why in the world would I air my laundry and get dinged at the beginning? And I’m sitting here going, well, I’m not really certain. I’m questioning how big are the ding you would receive. I mean they may look at and say, yeah, you know what? It may not be worth as much as we originally thought. But I have to believe downstream, after everybody’s put some time into it, they’re going to get dinged worse. You know what I mean? From a value penalty. What do you think?

Melissa Gragg: [00:53:58] If you have a skeleton in the closet, period, point blank, we have to pull them out. We have to dress them up. We have to put lipstick on them. We have to make it look good. But we need to tell them selling your company is like a relationship, okay. So, if you have, I don’t know, a really big issue, an STD, you probably should tell that person before you do that next step. And so, in selling your company, if you know that when they come to your facility, you know something’s going to be there that they’re not aware of, then why wouldn’t we prep? Why wouldn’t we just — here’s the thing is, why aren’t we just honest? Right? Just be honest. You want to buy it or not buy it.

And I think that that’s where these business owners are, because if they’re being approached, then they’re kind of like, okay. And I do say let’s anchor the deal. Like, let’s put that number out there because I want them to negotiate off of our number as opposed to, they come in and you want $5 million and they tell you $1, guess what’s going to happen? Every single day if you do that deal, you’re going to remember that day. Right? And you’re going to think that they tried to screw you and it’s just going to blow up. Like so much trust is built in the deal process with those two owners that if you — like we had a situation where there like there was some adjustment. And they’re like, oh, we don’t need to tell them about that. Oh yes, we do. Or we bought out — one of our deals, we bought out an owner like at a year before at a very different price. And they said do you have a valuation for that buyout, a report? And they said nope. Well, how did you buy him out? Oh, we did the analysis with Melissa, but we never summarized it in a report. Oh, really?

So, I presented the value to all the partners jointly, and they purchased each other out at that price or a similar price. And when they did it, they said, okay, well, we need it in writing so that everybody, I said no, I would not put it in writing. And they’re like, Why? I said, because when due diligence comes. And they say, can you give us your past valuation reports for the past five years, you get to say the truth, which is you don’t have one.

Ed Mysogland: [00:56:25] That’s great. No, that’s great.

Melissa Gragg: [00:56:26] So that’s how I protect you from yourself in the deal.

Ed Mysogland: [00:56:30] That is such great advice. And the funny thing is that these sellers, to me, the level of scrutiny and the amount of professional advisers that are going to be in this deal, it’s going to be found out. Whatever you think you’re going to hide, there’s no way that anybody’s going to not find it. And so, this caveat emptor stuff because you know, like I said, this other deal guy you know I’d never put a quality of earnings up front. Yeah. Well, I am totally on the opposite end of the spectrum, and it sounds to me like you are too.

Melissa Gragg: [00:57:17] Well and if you don’t give them the report, I think you have to do the work. I think if you’re going to consider — I mean, and you know, this is the stuff that we say. But if you’re going to consider selling, cleaning up your books, getting an idea of the value, because the reality is you’re going to think it’s worth more than it is figuring out what the after-tax effect, because guess what, there are taxes in these deals. That’s why we do stock — understanding a stock or asset sale. Like why do I care? Understanding what happens if you sell a C-Corp or an S-Corp. These are little things, but I think that that’s how you can start to educate the client is how do you do some of these things.

Now, I think that this is kind of different, but I think that we’re going to start moving towards a private marketplace and we’re going to start moving towards like a matchmaking kind of situation because like I have a certain type of company that my buyer wants, right? And they want a certain type of company. I was like, okay, we’re going to go look for it. And then the next week I get a call from somebody who wants to sell that company. And I was like, what? I was like, you know, I already have a buyer, but I’ll do that work, but I’m going to value it and I’m going to say what it’s worth because we have to do it for certain other purposes. And I can’t, it’s my reputation so I got to do it right.

But I think I could go back to my buyer and say, I already did this valuation. She doesn’t want that because it’s fair market value. She wants more. And now, conceptually — so like let’s say right now you and I are both businesses and my price tag says $10 million and yours says $7, right? So, you come to me and you’re like, hey, your price tag says $10 million like a matchmaking site kind of, right? Your price tag says $10 million. I said, oh, no, no, no, no. Yes, that’s what it’s worth. But like, for me to sell now, it’s going to be $12.

Now, what am I going to negotiate? I’m negotiating the premium. Everybody’s aware of what the fair market value, the base value. Now, do you want to buy it for a premium? What is your premium compared to that person’s premium? And now, I’m going to get what I’m worth, but I want more. Now you’re like, well, but your price tag says $10 million. I was like, yeah, I know, but that’s in five years. Thanks. Bye. $12 million today. Now you might say I would — now I got cancer and I’m like, they go, okay, will you take $9 million? And I’ll be like, yeah, I’ll take it right now, but it creates this openness about what the issues are. And we’re open dating, right. Because most for the most part, people don’t want to sell their company. When you ask business owners, do you want to sell your company, they say, no, we want to grow it. We want to expand. But they’re going to get the knock at the door. And that’s, I think what you have to be prepared for is when the knock comes, are you ready?

Ed Mysogland: [01:00:17] That’s a good point. All right. I appreciate you going over our time. So, my last question is the one I ask every guest is, what is the one piece of advice that you could give to the listeners that would have the greatest impact on their business? How’s that?

Melissa Gragg: [01:00:40] So, what I normally always tell people is know your numbers so you can be a brilliant marketer, you can be a brilliant rainmaker, you can have the personality the size of Texas. Everybody will love you. But there’s veracity and understanding behind numbers. And when you can at least talk the numbers, and if you can’t talk numbers, if numbers is not your strong point, then have somebody that does that you can understand from or like even attorneys. I’m like, you got to start understanding what the business mean. What do these business things mean? Because quite frankly, you know, like I’ve been talking to a lot of people about like chat GPT and stuff like that and AI. And I was like, AI is going to take away everything, all of this bullshit that comes out. Oh, can we just take that out? Any of that bull that comes out of our mouths can be created by AI.

So, you have to figure out why do they need you in the room, the virtual room, the actual room. So, if you’re just coming in and you’re spitting out or just doing this rote stuff because you heard somebody wants to buy a company, oh, you’re going to pay five times, three times EBITDA. If you don’t really know why somebody would pay a premium for you, if there’s not a differentiator, then there’s a problem. If you can’t walk away from it, you know, like I got a guy, he’s running an amazing company. And I was like, your goal is to leave for two weeks and not take a call. And he’s like, no. And I was like, okay, well, maybe it’s next year’s goal.

Ed Mysogland: [01:02:23] Right.

Melissa Gragg: [01:02:24] This year’s goal might be a little bit different, but I don’t think business owners understand that letting go of their business takes time. And so, you have time to get to know your numbers. You have time to know why things are moving, because, quite frankly, start budgeting, start projecting, work with somebody to see if you even line up with the projections and start to take a more calculated. Because for me personally, companies sell amazing on two to three years of great trajectory of growth and they sell well on top. You take that one dip down, it’s not so good anymore. So, it’s really like when’s the right timing and opportunity? And if somebody is going to come knock at your door, be ready, because that’s going to be the easiest deal you probably have ever done.

Ed Mysogland: [01:03:19] Hundred percent. And the fact of the matter is, is that there is so much activity of buyer. You know, it used to be that we were the kind of the conduit to the marketplace anymore. Oh, my gosh. You know, the work that we do to find buyers, anybody can do it. We may know different buyers and better buyers, but generally speaking, you know, the process of procuring a seller list and targeting and so on, so forth, there’s all kinds of books on it. But again, it is what it is.

Melissa Gragg: [01:03:58] I think people will move and shift towards more partnerships, more buying initiatives, trying to get lower costs on supplies and things like that. But the old, you know, merging and somebody is just going to take away all the risk and give you all the money, I don’t think that necessarily happens unless you have heavy equipment companies. But these service companies and things like that, I think you just have to be — you have to know how you are making money, if it can continue, and what reliance it has on you. And if you can answer those questions, those are going to be the bigger questions that a buyer is going to ask. And if the buyer doesn’t think they can ask you questions, how are they going to keep you around and how are they going to think that you’ve done something that’s sustainable? It’s your credibility at that point.

Ed Mysogland: [01:04:53] It is. Well, thanks twice for your time. You were awesome the first time. You were even better the second time. So, where can where can listeners find you?

Melissa Gragg: [01:05:08] Well, currently we have valuationmediation.com, which is really what we’re doing a lot of our valuation in some sort of collaborative fashion. Whether it’s really called mediation or not, it’s really just working with one person when you have multiple parties that just need a number. But that’s a good way to reach out to me. You can connect on LinkedIn. I’m always connecting with LinkedIn, people, even strangers. I know that’s verboten, but I’m fine with it. And reach out to me. Most people have my cell phone and it’s pretty much everywhere on the websites. And if I have the capability to answer, I do. So, I get a lot of calls from like, I saw a video and I have a question and I’m like, great. And sometimes they result in like great cases or clients. So, I think just put yourself out there and be available.

Ed Mysogland: [01:06:02] I got it. And you also have a podcast too.

Melissa Gragg: [01:06:06] Oh yeah, I forgot about that. Yeah, we do have Valuationpodcast.com. This is what happens when you get two podcasters together. Like really, what? Like I’m in the role of I don’t have to worry about that, but we do. We also have a mediatorpodcast.com Which is for the mediation side of it because I think that’s going to be really big in the future as well.

Ed Mysogland: [01:06:28] I agree. Well, Melissa, it’s been great. I sure appreciate your time and I can’t wait to hear the feedback from people because this is a different way of looking at a common issue. So, I’m so grateful for our time. Thanks again.

Melissa Gragg: [01:06:44] All right. Well, thanks, Ed. I appreciate it. Not a lot of people have me on other podcasts, so this is awesome.

Ed Mysogland: [01:06:51] Well, they’re just going to have to listen to this one and they’ll figure out what a great guest you are. Thanks again.

Male: [01:06:58] Thank you for joining us today on How to Sell your Business podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit HowtosellaBusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso Inc. All rights reserved.

 

Tagged With: business owner, business sale, business valuation, buy sell agreement, CDFA, Certified Divorce Financial Analyst, divorce, divorce settlement, Ed Mysogland, Family Business, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, valuation

How Wineries Create Value, with Genevieve Rodgers, PEMDAS Winery Solutions

January 24, 2023 by John Ray

PEMDAS Solutions
How to Sell a Business
How Wineries Create Value, with Genevieve Rodgers, PEMDAS Winery Solutions
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

PEMDAS Solutions

How Wineries Create Value, with Genevieve Rodgers, PEMDAS Winery Solutions (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 8)

Award-winning winemaker, consultant, engineer, and professed math geek Genevieve Rodgers of PEMDAS Winery Solutions joined host Ed Mysogland on this episode of How To Sell a Business Podcast. Genevieve gave an overview of the major roles in a winery business, the key elements that impact the winery’s success (it’s not just about the wine), how wineries get financing, what questions buyers should be asking, how a winery creates value, risk management, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

PEMDAS Winery Solutions

PEMDAS Solutions offers winery consulting solutions to meet clients needs. Services include: winery business development, design, winemaking consulting, financial forecasting, winery business education and project management.

With over twenty years of experience in the wine industry, PEMDAS Solutions has the knowledge and experience that helps clients create and grow successful businesses in the wine and spirits industry. PEMDAS has worked with wineries, vineyards, cideries and spirits producers from startups to existing businesses.

Their clients are small (less than 1,000 cases) to mid-size (500,000 cases) and span the globe. If you are looking for someone who has experience working in all aspects of this exciting industry, PEMDAS Solutions can help.

Company website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Instagram | Twitter

Genevieve Rodgers, Owner, PEMDAS Winery Solutions

Genevieve Rodgers, Owner, PEMDAS Winery Solutions

Genevieve Rodgers, owner of PEMDAS Winery Solutions, a winery and business consulting company in the US, has over twenty years of experience in winemaking and start-up winery business consulting. Genevieve brought her engineering and business management background to Sonoma, California in 1997 to help start her family’s winery. She went on to manage the estate vineyard, produce award winning wine and start her own winery before adding winery business consulting to her repertoire.

Genevieve has experience in all aspects of the wine business from vineyard design to sales and marketing and is an award winning winemaker with experience making wines from over a dozen grape varieties. She is fortunate to help people all over the world realize their winery business dreams.

Genevieve holds a Bachelors of Science in Mechanical Engineering from the University of California at Davis, a Masters in Business Administration from Chapman University, California, USA and an advanced, Level 3, Certification in Wine from the Wine & Spirits Education Trust.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business Podcast, where, every week, we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors, and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:35] On today’s episode, I had the opportunity to visit with Genevieve Rodgers of PEMDAS Winery Solutions. And, boy, I can’t even begin to tell you everything that we learned during her episode. It went a little bit longer and she was so generous with her time. But she’s a winery consultant, and if you just Google her name, you will find that she is everywhere.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:03] So, she’s an MBA. She’s an engineer by trade. She’s also a Level 3 of the Wine and Spirit Education Trust. She does all kinds of work as far as strategic planning, company or winery positioning. And she was just such a wealth of knowledge. And I guess the reason I really wanted to have her on was, number one, I don’t know anything about wineries. We’ve sold a few in the last, probably, five, ten years, but they were difficult sales.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:40] And believe it or not, there are a lot of wineries throughout the country, and those business owners, at some point, will want to sell. So, the rough rule of thumb is that it takes one to two years to sell a winery. And I wanted to learn where’s the risk in the winery, how to mitigate that risk, and then how to effectively transfer those businesses. And she did not disappoint. She was, like I said, so generous with her time and such a wealth of knowledge. So, I hope you enjoy my conversation with Genevieve Rodgers of PEMDAS Winery Solutions.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:22] I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. On this podcast, I interview buyers, sellers, and advisors about what creates value in a business and then how that business is effectively sold at a premium value, because sellers and business owners now understand what creates values in their company. So, on today’s show, you have no idea how excited I am to visit with Genevieve Rodgers from PEMDAS Winery Solutions.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:53] And I am such a novice at anything wine related. I have a buddy of mine, John Baker, that always makes me look good as far as wine selection. So, I’m fortunate to have somebody in my corner, but now I’m going to get a lot smarter because I got Genevieve. So, Genevieve, welcome to the show.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:03:14] Thank you, Ed. I am pleased to be here.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:18] So, tell me about PEMDAS Winery Solutions. I haven’t seen any business named PEMDAS, but I know what it means. So, tell me about it.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:03:30] Well, that’s why I picked it. And I’m an engineer by my original training and so sort of a math geek. So, when I started this business, I really wanted to help people work through how to start a winery, how to run a winery, how to have a winery in an organized manner. And so, being a math geek, I came to PEMDAS, which is how you, in an organized method, solve a mathematical equation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:09] You know what? That makes total sense. That’s a great way to look at how your practice is. I wouldn’t have guessed it, but, you know, I always just figured you were just messing with acronyms. But there was substantially more thought that went into it and that’s awesome.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:04:28] Probably too much thought, but yes, yes. And it’s interesting to me, there’s people who are in certain groups that see PEMDAS and say, “Oh, I know what that is. Isn’t that math?” And people who look at me and say, “What is that? I have no idea,” which I think is really interesting. But since I like math, it works for me.

Ed Mysogland: [00:04:58] I get it. So, you’re based out of Oregon, right?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:05:02] Well, that’s where my home is. But my clients are all over the United States and I have some international clients. So, I do a lot of my work from home office, a lot of my work over the internet with clients, things that can be shared electronically. And then, I do winemaking consulting onsite for clients, and so then I travel and I’ll be at the winery.

Ed Mysogland: [00:05:34] Well, awesome. So, I’ll apologize in advance for some of the silly questions that I’m certain I’m going to ask that probably would be rudimentary to folks like you. So, I appreciate the latitude. But the first thing that I guess we should talk about is that there’s differences in wineries. Like you were talking about, case thresholds, there’s the larger operations versus the smaller operations. And I think the people that listen to this podcast are probably more geared to the smaller side because there are some substantial differences, right, other than volume?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:06:20] There are some really big differences and it’s almost like being in two different industries. And people can think about it in the difference between your local hardware store and Home Depot. And that’s kind of where the winery is. So, you have some really, really big players in the United States and across the world that make millions of cases of wine. But most of the wineries in the world, most of the wineries in the United States, are making less than 5,000 cases of wine annually.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:06:58] So, what you see in the stores, and if you’re going to grocery stores, you’re seeing primarily the big wineries, really big million cases annually of wineries. And then, you might see some local wineries that are smaller scale. And you might see some wineries that are kind of mid-size that make specific products to specific value that they’re big enough to be picked up through distribution and sold across across the nation.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:07:35] But the majority of wineries are really fairly small, under 10,000 cases. And wineries that are family-owned, they’re small. So, the cost basis is very, very different and the way they sell wine is very different. Because their cost base is so different than selling through the distribution market, it’s taking their margin and cutting it at least in half. So, that becomes a real boundary for small wineries, is like, when I have a higher cost basis, am I going to be able to sell it at half or just sell it to a distribution? So, it sets up almost two different industries.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:43] Yeah. So, that explains a little bit about why you see all of these small operations having – what’s the best way to put it? – onsite – I don’t want to say tourism type winery, but it seems as though that is more so why they do it because that’s how they get the distribution as opposed to going through your normal distribution chain, right?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:09:17] That’s correct. And, really, if you look at the sales distribution for small wineries, and you look at averages, and you look at wineries that are doing well, they should be selling 85 plus percent of their sales directly to the consumer. So, you’re either doing it through your tasting room, you’re doing it through your wine club, you’re doing it through your website. That’s your direct to consumer market.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:09:53] And for small wineries, like if you’re under 20,000 cases, the vast majority of your sales should be through those markets. So then, you need a tasting room, somewhere where you connect with customers. If you’re a huge winery, there’s not a whole lot of value in that for you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:17] I get it. That totally makes sense. One of the things, I guess, can you take me from cradle to grave? So, we start with grapes and then we end with a bottle of wine in the consumer’s hand. I mean, what is the mechanics of all of that from a high level? You don’t have to get too far in the weeds. But I know you work with startups.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:10:42] I do. I do work for a startups. So, I like to say that there’s three different types of people in a winery. The first type of person is a farmer. So, you’re going to grow grapes. And grapes are a perennial. They’re a lot more like having an orchard than other other types of fruit, because you’ll plant and you’ll plant for the next 25 years. That plant is going to grow for 25 years, if not more. So, it’s a real dedication to the land, to that crop, to those individual plants.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:11:21] And you want a good winery that has its own grapes. You don’t have to, but a good winery that has its own grapes is growing grapes that work with that climate and those soils, and that produce a wine that customers like. And you have to do all of those things. So, grapes are kind of a weed. They’ll grow anywhere. But what you need is you need a grape that will grow well, that will give you volume and quality in which to make a product that people are going to like at the price point that you need to sell it for. You have to do all of those.

Ed Mysogland: [00:12:06] Can I ask you a question? Can I ask you about the grapes?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:12:12] Sure.

Ed Mysogland: [00:12:12] So, if I’m a farmer, does the winery owner, if I don’t own the farmland, do I get exclusivity? Is that how it works? Or if I’m a farmer, I’m going to sell it to anybody that needs my grapes?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:12:34] You know, most wineries have contracts with farmers. It a little bit depends on the area that you’re in and the ability to get grapes. If you’re a farmer and you are growing grapes really well, you should look for contracts that are long term and you build a relationship. And that’s really what a winery wants, too, because the winemaker wants consistency and they want to be able to direct the grape growing practices. And so, for that, you need a relationship.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:18] So, the winery that contracts with the farmer, they have control over certain aspects of the farming other than just the product?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:13:33] You know, it’s by contract. And so, everything is a little bit different. Sometimes wineries will have long term contracts, and then it makes sense for those two organizations to work together and farm in a certain manner. And then, wineries will often get to a point where they’ll be growing or where the volume that they’re getting from one farm isn’t enough because of the year, and they buy, basically, on the spot market. And then, you’re just getting whatever someone grew.

Ed Mysogland: [00:14:14] I see. All right. So, first thing you said is three parts. We had farmers. What’s our second part?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:14:20] The second part is the winemaker. So, the winemaker is this person who has a really high attention to detail, is somewhere between a scientist and an artist. They make the wine. And I like to say, a good winemaker is a little bit OCD. There’s a lot of attention to how the wine is made on a daily, hourly basis. And you want someone who’s really methodical.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:14:53] And so, that person is going to bridge the two parts. They will direct some of the growing to get the raw product that meets their quality standards and their chemistry that they’re looking for. And then, they work with the sales, which is the third person, to make the wine that’s going to match what’s being sold.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:15:23] So, the winemaker is going to get the grapes in. They process it through the harvest. You ferment it. There’s different processes during fermentation. And then, you press it and you put it into tanks or barrels to age it, and then you bottle it. And bottling then goes to this third person who is the sales management person.

Ed Mysogland: [00:15:54] Got it. So, on the scientist or the chemist, how hard is it to find somebody that does that? Is that just somebody you hire or is that typically the owner?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:16:10] Yes. For small wineries, it is typically the owner. And the owner either has that background – and I see a lot of first time owners that have backgrounds in engineering. So, the owner either has that background or they go out and get that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:37] How do you get it?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:16:38] Well, there are programs around the country that teach winemaking to adults who have already graduated. So, Cornell has a program, Penn State has a program, University of California, Davis has a program, San Luis Obispo. There’s a whole bunch of programs around the country where you can take online or in-person classes as a professional already. And you get a certification.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:12] Finish your thought.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:17:13] You get a certification in winemaking.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:17] And that gives you enough knowledge to produce a commercial grade wine, huh? I wouldn’t have known that.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:17:29] Yeah. And you can go the route. I mean, that’s sort of the route I took. I have an engineering degree. I have an MBA. When my family started a winery, nobody had ever made wine. And so, I took classes. I became the winemaker with my engineering degree and my MBA. And I took classes and I worked with a couple of consultants, and so I was learning. The consultant would say, “Do this today,” and I would go and do that. But then, I was learning at the same time.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:18:09] So, you can do both. You can do one or the other. It really depends on your temperament and how much work you want to put into it. Because there is a lot that you need to know to make wine well. Or you can hire someone.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:27] Well, and that’s what I was getting at, is that it seems like the astute wine people in my life, they are always talking about different things about the wine. And so, when we’re talking about chemistry and stuff, I’m sitting here going, “Okay. How do I learn this online in order to be able to produce something in a manner that is attractive to the consumer?” You know what I mean? But I mean, it makes sense. So, you worked with somebody and that’s probably what other people can do.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:19:13] And it’s one of the things that I do, is, I come to wineries and I train people to take over my job, basically. And while I’m not there, they’re doing the work. We’re talking, I’m saying do this, they do that. But they’re also learning intensely on why this is happening so that they can then take over.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:38] Yeah. I thought it was so much more about tasting and tailoring it based on kind of a palate that you were going for.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:19:52] It is. It is too. So, that’s why I said that it’s science and art. Because you can’t do it straight on the chemistry. So, wine is made usually during fermentation. It’s really when the wine is made. And that’s a couple of weeks. So, if I’m making wine and I’m at a winery, I will taste every single tank, barrel, lot in the winery at least once a day, if not twice a day, if not three times a day. And then, I will make changes to how the fermentation is going based on those tastes. So, you do have to do both.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:20:50] And you also have to understand, if I want a product that tastes a certain way at the end after it’s aged, what do I need to do now during fermentation in order to get that? And that’s something that you have to have the mind for it, but you also have to have some experience doing it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:15] I get it. All right. So, you had talked on the third part, which is the sales. So, what is at this level? I mean, what is the optimum route to maximum value? I think we’ve established that probably you don’t want to go to a distributor because you don’t have the volume to accommodate that. So, it sounds to me that it’s direct to consumer, and the ways – if I heard you right – was your tasting room, events, and online. Those are the three or areas did I miss any?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:21:54] And wine club, which is actually the backbone. So, if someone has a winery or starting a winery, the most important thing that they can do is determine what experience they are creating their wine. That is by far the most important thing that a winery can do to be successful, is, what experience do I want people to have when they visit, when they come to my winery and come to an event, when they taste my wine at home, when they come to my website, what do I want them to feel? What am I creating for them?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:22:43] Because people who love wine and get into the industry, I think that it’s all about the wine. Because that’s what’s been important to them while they’ve been drinking wine, it’s about the wine. This wine is fantastic because of this criteria. But that’s not actually how wine is sold. Wine is sold based on the experience that people have, and the wine is integral. But it’s not always the most important, but it is integral. So, that’s the first thing that people should do.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:23:23] And if they have a winery and they’re thinking “I would like to sell this at some point,” they need to nail that down, what am I creating? And then, figure out, is that what I think I’m creating or what I’m actually creating? Because those two things can be different. And then, does everything match? Is the experience I’m trying to create, does that match the wine that I’m selling? Does it match the prices that I’m selling it at? Does the label match? How about the packaging? How about my website? And when people call me on the phone, is it all consistent?

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:11] But when you’re sub-20,000 cases – is it cases?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:24:18] Cases.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:18] Cases. So, I mean I follow what you’re saying. What I’m trying to reconcile with is, can they create that brand consistency that you’re talking about? And, again, it’s back to the wine. You know, so you have a great product, so how do I make everything downstream tied together? You know what I mean? And I’m certain that’s the trick in your industry is, if they knew, you wouldn’t have a job.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:25:11] That is true. And this is where I get myself out of the job, I teach people how to do this. So, you start first with the experience and what do you want people to have. So, there’s a winery in Napa called Opus One. And I use it because lots of people know it. They make a single wine. One wine a year. Period. And they tell you this is a singular wine. It’s part of their vision statement. A singular wine that transcends generations, that’s their vision statement. So, that’s what they do.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:25:56] So, if you imagine in your head, “Okay. Well, what does that look like?” The place is going to be something you remember. You’re going to look at that building, “Oh. That’s it. That looks like an imagé to wine. That looks like a wine museum where the best wines would be stored. Then, your price is going to match that. So, that’s not a $20 bottle of wine. That’s a $300, $400 bottle of wine. So, they do a really good job. And that’s why I use them is because everything matches.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:26:41] But it doesn’t have to be the best of the best. You can have a place where families come and they have a great time together. Well, what does that look like for a wine? It’s going to be a lower price point. You’re going to have a bigger breath of wine. Some of it will probably be sweeter off-dry if you’re going to have whites and reds. That’s kind of how you progress through this.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:10] I get it. And I think that’s where business owners get themselves in trouble, is, they’re looking at volume rather than playing the long game and get the experience down, and the money and the profit will follow. That totally makes sense.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:27:29] And part of the thing is something that you kind of maybe didn’t realize you were alluding to at the beginning. Most consumers don’t really know a lot about wine. Like, you are not unusual. Most consumers don’t know a lot about wine. They like what they like. They’ve tasted the wine. It tastes good to them. That’s what they know.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:27:55] And so, when you think about it in that manner, it’s really not as much about the wine itself, because people don’t know a lot about the wine. What they know is that they had a good time. Everybody enjoyed themselves. Or someone that they know recommended this, they probably drank it together. And so, wine, especially for small wineries – and this is hard because I’m a winemaker – you really need to get out of this idea that it’s all about the wine, because it’s not.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:42] Okay. No, that’s great advice. So, we were talking about the farmers earlier, I mean, we’ve got some pretty funky weather going on these days, you know, because one of the things you were talking about when we talked last was how important it is to kind of foresee what is the outlook for the region. And I guess as a business owner, I value companies all the time. And one of the tendency is, what does the future look like for this particular investment? And I’m looking at a winemaker and they’re trying to forecast what the farmland and the farmer and the climate looks like down the road. So, how do you do that? And how do you pivot if it goes back?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:29:54] So, you know, one of the benefits for winemaking is, like I said, grapes are kind of like a weed. They will do well in a climate range. But you do want to target the varieties that is going to do better in your climate range. And there’s a lot of them. And part of it is, if you’re in the United States, you go to your extension program, which works with agricultural and farms, and you say to them, “What’s brewing in my state?” And you work to make sure that the land is going to be good for grapes and that you pick the right grapes for it.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:30:54] And then, there is some looking forward, and it depends on how much risk you want to take. If you plant a grape right now, you’ll get a good crop in five years. The climate is probably not going to change substantially in that five years to make this grape nonviable. It’s still going to be viable. It will still be viable in ten years.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:31:21] There might be a grape that’s kind of on the edge of your climate that you may take a risk on and say, “I’m going to plant that now because I can see what’s been happening with the climate in my region, and this is going to be really good in ten years.” That’s a risk, and it depends on how risk-averse you are.

Ed Mysogland: [00:31:54] You know, we were talking and it was a question I was going to ask that little down the road was, you know, especially in selling wineries, you’re talking one, two years to sell it, to find the right buyer and to sell it. And then, on top of it, trying to see into the crystal ball what my crops are going to look like or what my grapes are going to look like, you know, 5, 10, 15 years down the road. And I guess my question is, do I lock-in the farmer? Do contracts go out that far? Or are they one year and then one year renewable? You know what I mean?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:32:36] Contracts are all over the map. And contracts in the Midwest are very different than contracts in California, where 85 percent of the wine in the United States –. So, what is common is a multi-year contract that is more like four or five years or one year renewable contract.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:33:00] And the contracts are with the business, but there’s a lot of contracts that are really with the owners. So, if you’re purchasing a winery that doesn’t have its own grapes, you want to talk to their grape sources and get a feel for do I want to work with these people, are they going to give me the quality that I need, are they going to give me the volume that I need so I can be consistent and have a consistent cash flow.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:36] So, if I’m a buyer and you’re a seller, and I meet your farmer and I like him or her and we kind of get along, why wouldn’t they want to do business with me? I mean, is it all economic?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:33:58] No, it’s not. It’s not all economic. No, it’s not.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:58] Because we were talking about this the other day about goodwill.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:34:02] And, you know, it’s hard for me to answer that question because I’ve seen vineyard owners that say, “I want a five year contract and let’s write out how we’re going to value the crop so that it’s reasonable for everyone. I want to do that. And I want you to take all of my crops. Like, everything I grow, I want you to take.” And then, I’ve seen some growers who say, “I want five buyers every year. I don’t want one buyer because I don’t trust that they’re going to do right by me every year.”

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:34:44] And so, it’s very individual. And part of it also depends on where you’re located. And what experience those growers have makes a big difference too. And when I say experience, I mean experience working with wineries.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:06] Yeah. Yeah. I follow you. Well, like I said, it’s one of those things of – boy – everything is sizing up risk and the prospect of losing your supplier. I guess my question then becomes, does the farmer have the leverage over the business owner or the winemaker? Who has leverage in that —

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:35:41] It depends on the scarcity, really. If you’re the only grower, then you’re the only grower, you’re the only game in town. If you’re one of 50, then it doesn’t. So, that’s where it really starts to make a difference. And then, it’s personality. You’re working with people and it’s getting a good mix that people work together.

Ed Mysogland: [00:36:08] Okay. So, what do typical owners look like these days? What’s an owner of a winery?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:36:15] For a small winery, it’s all over the map. If I look at my clients, I have clients who started wineries who are retired, they made money. And one gentleman who is just opening a winery in New Jersey said, “You know, Genevieve, I spent my career making money and doing things for other people. Now, I want to do something for me. This is for me.” So, that is one group.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:36:58] Another group is, I get a lot of people who are younger than I am – I mean, I guess at my age a lot of people are younger than I am – they’re in their 20s and 30s, and some of them have legacy farms in their family. And so, now they’re going to turn a legacy farm that is growing corn or soybeans or something else and change the way that farm works.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:37:36] And then, it’s all over the map. Usually, it’s people who have liked wine and who want to do something different, and they want to do something that they’re going to love. And that’s really important if you’re going to buy a winery, because people who buy wineries, unless you’re buying it for someone else to run, it will become your life. There’s really not an in-between. So, you want to love it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:38:11] I get it. So, it strikes me that the avatar of somebody that wants to get into this business is a high net worth individual that is either on one side of the scale, meaning they’re at retirement age looking for kind of the next chapter of their life, or they’re on the younger side and they’re trying to set the world on fire but yet they have the net worth to pour into something like this. Is that true or not?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:38:53] I think that’s true for the most part. I find that the people who are younger, who are starting this, they’re really bootstrapping it. But they don’t have to purchase the land. And so, that makes a huge difference in how much money and capital you need to start over. And you can do that. But I think you’re right, for the most part you’re going to be looking at people who have equity and have money to spend or have equity and have a group behind them that has the capital.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:36] I get it. So, I know you just alluded to private investment. I mean, do these things get financed through conventional means, like through the SBA or through conventional banks? Are you familiar with that? And I know I’m kind of jumping all over here, but I’m just kind of curious to see how that works.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:40:07] The bigger startup wineries do get with commercial banks and conventional loans. For smaller wineries, it’s harder. You really have to make the case. And it is one of the things that I do. So, I create ten year financial forecasts that you can take to a bank. But you have to take it to a bank who understands what’s going on. Because this is not something that you can just turn around the next year. This is a long term project.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:40:50] So, startup wineries do not make money the first year or the second year. And they start getting to the block on an annual basis in their third or fourth year. But it does take five, six, seven, eight years to actually get truly profitable where you’ve paid back your loans and all of your capital, and now you’re actually making money.

Ed Mysogland: [00:41:32] Now, are those capital sources exclusive to the industry? I mean, my point is I’m certain there’s a lot of people that are probably listening saying, “You know what? If I get a buyer, I’m going to call Genevieve because she knows where the capital is. I have lenders that specialize or understand this industry and the risk profile.” You got those people?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:41:54] Let me just say, it’s not my forte. But, yes, there are. A lot of them are in California or they’re ag based banks. You can qualify for SBA loans. It’s sort of a hard sell, but you can do it. And I’ve worked with the SBA.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:42:31] And you probably have had this experience, when someone’s trying to get funding for a project, if you’re buying a winery, first, you’re looking at their cash flows. Do they have positive cash flows for years, not just this year? But do they have a history of positive cash flows? That goes a long way to a lender saying, “Yeah. I’ll lend that to you,” because they’re looking at their years of positive cash flow. If you’re starting up, that’s a more difficult sell.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:12] Yeah. Sure. It always is. I get it. I’m bumping up on time. Do you have time for a few more questions?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:43:26] I do.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:26] All right. So, on the coronavirus, how did that affect the smaller business? Did it affect the supply chain as much as it did for a lot of the larger wineries or not?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:43:43] It did. It did affect the supply chain. For smaller wineries, primarily at the end of making wine, which is bottling. Small wineries have and continue to have a very difficult time getting bottles. And that’s been a problem. Yes. And it’s been a really, really substantial problem that is ongoing, because what is happening in the Ukraine is affecting the cost of energy in Europe, where a lot of the bottles are made. And bottle making is high energy usage. And so, not only are costs going up, the supply is going down.

Ed Mysogland: [00:44:34] I had no idea.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:44:35] That’s been the biggest as far as supply chain that’s hit the industry is in bottles. The pandemic affected the industry differently in that it closed a lot of tasting rooms and the ability for people to come in to your tasting room. And so, wineries had to pivot. And the wineries that did well did pivot. They kept in touch with all their consumers. They worked their wine club. They worked online sales and classes and meet the winemaker. They did all that. And the industry in the United States actually grew through the pandemic.

Ed Mysogland: [00:45:26] Yeah. And that totally makes sense. And as you know, one of my questions was, as restaurant usage is declining, the consumer usage is growing. And based on what you were saying on the areas where you create value through the tasting room, through online, and through the wine club, the pandemic for the smaller wineries, if you played it right, probably, it did pretty good for you. That your margins actually probably improved, right?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:46:15] The small wineries that had a wine club, to start with, and built consumer loyalty, and built interactions with their consumers over the years before the pandemic, they were able to leverage that and continue to give real value to their customers who stayed with them. And not only did they stay with them, but they bought more wine. And their cost basis then went down because they didn’t have an employee in a tasting room and have to staff that. Now, they’re staffing someone shipping wine and moving wine as opposed to tasting them.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:47:02] So, the wineries that did that really well, they made out, because now all of that infrastructure is still good. It’s still viable. People still buy wine over the internet. They still want that interaction. So, if I’m a winery buyer, show me how you did during the pandemic. What is your wine club like now? How are your interactions? Because those have real values.

Ed Mysogland: [00:47:42] But, conversely, if I’m the buyer and I’m saying, “Oh, you didn’t capitalize on the wine club, you didn’t capitalize on online,” from a buyer standpoint, am I not sitting there saying, “Wow. I have a tremendous opportunity to take advantage of something you didn’t?” Or has that ship already passed?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:48:03] It has not. That opportunity is always there. And, really, from a buyer point of view, what you would do is you would look – and I say – wine club is based on the brand. The value of the wine club is how you value the brand. And so, if they haven’t done that, then the value of the brand – which is what we call this goodwill amorphous value that we put on when we’re selling something – declines. And most likely you’re going to come out with a new brand and do something else. So, yeah, it does give you that opportunity but your starting point, though, is then lower from a sales perspective.

Ed Mysogland: [00:49:01] Right. Right. But if I’m the seller, maybe I wasn’t aware of what to do. But, nevertheless, that’s where the value is. And you talked about this a little bit when we originally talked was, the goodwill component tends to erode very quickly. Meaning that you’ve got inventory, you’ve got the equipment, and now you have what we’re talking about is goodwill. And then, goodwill separates into personal goodwill or the branding. And then, you have corporate goodwill is the earnings that you can forecast.

Ed Mysogland: [00:49:54] So, where I was going with this is, I’m curious to know if you’re coaching a seller, how do I sell that I have that goodwill? Because the equipment is what it is. How do I demonstrate that I do have the goodwill? So, I’m certain it’s mailing list, wine club. But how am I going to withstand the scrutiny of a buyer? How would you coach in that scenario?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:50:37] So, the goodwill you’re looking at a couple of things. One, you’re looking at the wine club, which is an annual income that is really easy to forecast and put a value on. So, that’s a big piece and that’s probably going to be a significant portion where you say, “Look. I’ve got this value because I have a wine club and it’s this size.”

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:51:12] Another thing that you’re going to look at is how many people walk through your door. And if you’re going to sell your winery, you should be counting those people and literally tallying every single person who walks through your door.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:51:28] Because there’s lots of potential sale. And as a winery consultant, I can tell you what that potential sale is. There’s a real value — many people walk through your door. You may take advantage of it or you may not. But I think that’s a piece of the goodwill. And that has to do partly with your location, partly with your marketing, how you’re branded, how people know you.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:52:00] So, those would be the two biggest things that I would say maximize your value of those two things because you can really sell those and those have that goodwill value.

Ed Mysogland: [00:52:21] Again, what do buyers look like? I mean, I know we said here’s what a seller looks like. We’re on both sides of the spectrum. So, buyers these days, is it the same avatar? I guess the first question is, are you seeing wineries sell? And two, who’s doing the buying?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:52:50] So, small wineries, the reality is most small wineries don’t actually sell well. And you talked about this, like, it takes a couple of years. Most small wineries don’t actually sell well and most of them just close.

Ed Mysogland: [00:53:09] Because of what?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:53:12] They don’t have these cash flows. Either they don’t know how or they were not able to, for whatever reason, they don’t have this. And so, their winery brand doesn’t have a lot of value. Now, their property has value. The buildings have value. Their equipment may or may not have value.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:53:41] I was asked today by someone who’s starting a winery and he says, “Well, how long do I keep this?” And I told him, I said, “Well, I can hear your children in the background, they’re the ones who will replace this equipment that you’re buying.” That’s the lifespan of equipment. And his children were young.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:54:03] So, we were talking about what does this person look like? One, most wineries don’t sell. That’s just the reality. Most wineries close. The wineries that sell are selling to someone who wants this as a lifestyle, because it is a lifestyle. You may be selling it to someone who has made money, who has been a real high achiever, like a lawyer or a surgeon or someone who’s been in construction or building and they’ve done something for a long period of time. They have equity and they have capital. Now, they want to do something for them. And that’s the kind of lifestyle that they want to lead. Those really are the buyers.

Ed Mysogland: [00:55:03] Okay. Back to the sellers, though, and I have two questions that kind of go hand in hand. If I’m a business owner, can you coach me into making my winery a marketable asset to a buyer? And if so, how long does it take? And then, I guess the third question is, how do I work with someone like you? It seems to me like you’re going lots of places. How do we work together as a seller?

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:55:41] If you’re a seller and you want to sell your winery, it’s a long term process, unless your winery is sale ready.

Ed Mysogland: [00:55:59] So, what does that mean? Tell me what that means.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:55:59] So, if you’re sale ready, you have years of cash flow that are positive, that are consistent. You can show that you have put in money to keeping up your equipment, to training your staff, to your facility. You have been doing ongoing maintenance and everything is in real working order. You’ve got those two things from just a straight production business side.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:56:34] The next thing that you need to have is you need to have wine, that is – what we call in the industry – clean. It needs to be good wine. And so, it needs to be free of faults. Because faults are a winemaking problem that make the wine not taste good to consumers. Also, wine that has faults has no value to a buyer. So, if I’ve got a whole bunch of wine and tank, but that wine has faults, that wine has no value to a seller. It’s bad inventory. So, I would work with you to fix that, but that takes one to two vintages minimum because you have to get through that wine. So, you do those things and then work to build your wine club.

Ed Mysogland: [00:57:29] What is vintage? Sorry about that.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:57:34] Okay. Grapes are harvested one time of year in the United States. We put the vintage, which is the year that you see on the bottle, is based on when we picked those grapes. So, right now, the vintage that is in tanks at people’s wineries is 2022. But what you’re seeing coming out in the marketplace would be 2021 and ’20. So, it takes a while.

Ed Mysogland: [00:58:11] Okay. That makes sense. Got it. Thanks.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:58:12] So, if you want to get there, you’ve got to get through a couple of vintages, which is years, to get sale ready.

Ed Mysogland: [00:58:23] Okay. So, I need a couple of years with you to get sale ready. And during that time, you’re going to work on faults. You’re going to work on how to improve cash flow and how to shore up the online, the wine club, and tasting at this level. Okay.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:58:41] It depends on what people need, but some of it I come onsite. So, I would come onsite and we’d taste for all your wine, every single thing you have. And we would talk about what’s going on, where you need to go, and how you get there. And then, some of it is one hour sessions where we talk on the phone and you say, “Okay, Genevieve. This is what I’ve been doing. This is where I am.” And I say, “Okay. Well, here’s your next steps. Like, this is where you need to concentrate. What questions do you have? How can I help you understand?” And then, as the winery owner, you then have to execute.

Ed Mysogland: [00:59:30] Got it. And I always kind of conclude every podcast with, you know, what is the one piece of advice that you would give that would have the most impact on somebody’s business? And I’m assuming it’s preparing, but I may be wrong.

Genevieve Rodgers: [00:59:48] If you want to go into this industry or you’re in this industry, if you’ve got a winery, you want to start a winery, the most important thing that you can do is fully understand, write down and encompass what is the experience you’re creating. How are you creating it with every single thing you do? In this industry, that is going to be the most impactful for your business and the wine industry.

Ed Mysogland: [01:00:27] Awesome. So, number one, how do people connect with you? And number two, how does your process work? How do I work with Genevieve?

Genevieve Rodgers: [01:00:38] So, the best way is my website, winery.consulting is my website. Or if you go to Google and you type in winery consultant, I’m at the top of the list. That is the easiest way to find me. And then, you go on my contact page and it sends me an email and says, “Genevieve, here’s what I’ve got, let’s connect.” And then, we set up a one hour phone call or video conference.

Genevieve Rodgers: [01:01:11] Usually one hour works and people say, like, “This is what I need.” And we’ll decide, like, am I the right person for you? Because it’s important to me that we get the right fit, and then we go forward. And it depends on what you need. Sometimes people need hourly work, sometimes they need me onsite for a day, two days, a week. I’m flexible in that. And then, we go from there.

Ed Mysogland: [01:01:45] Yeah. So, you scope the work and this is what I need. And you scope it, this is kind of the mechanics and the deliverables, and you go from there.

Genevieve Rodgers: [01:01:55] That’s my background, too, so that’s exactly what I do. It’s like,
here’s my deliverables, here’s my — this is how much it costs. That’s what I do.

Ed Mysogland: [01:02:10] I get you. Well, Genevieve, I’m telling you, we’re probably bumping up into 80 episodes, and normally I’m fairly versed at a lot of the things that I’m talking about. But you enlighten me so much about how this world works. And my buddy, John, he’s our wine guy. You know, you were talking about the experience. He’s the guy. No one knows what to drink other than him and he hooks us up every time. And so, I’m so grateful that you have now given me something to talk to him about, because this is awesome.

Ed Mysogland: [01:02:59] And I’m certain that our listeners have learned a lot because what a unique business. Everybody drinks a lot of wine, and to learn how this is made and the mechanics behind it, I hope we’ll find some some people that are willing to give it a go and get into this industry. So, thanks for all your time. I know we went long and I’m certainly grateful that you were willing to take a couple extra minutes with me.

Genevieve Rodgers: [01:03:29] Well, it was a pleasure. It was a pleasure talking with you. And since I love what I do and I love the industry that I’m in, it’s really easy to talk about it.

Ed Mysogland: [01:03:43] Yeah. Well, you made it super easy for someone like me to understand it. And if I can understand it, others will too. So, everything about you will be in the show notes. So, those of you listening, don’t hesitate to look to the show notes, because everything that we’ve talked about and more will be there. All right. Well, Genevieve, thank you so much. And I am so happy that we finally got together.

Genevieve Rodgers: [01:04:15] It was a pleasure, Ed. I’m very happy to be on your show. And it was fun.

Ed Mysogland: [01:04:24] Right on.

Outro: [01:04:27] Thank you for joining us today on the How to Sell Your Business Podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

Tagged With: business consultant, business owner, business valuation, Ed Mysogland, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, PEMDAS Winery Solution, start-up winery, transfer value, value, vineyard, wine farmer, wine industry, winemaker, winery, winery business, winery owner

Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, and Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems

January 12, 2023 by John Ray

Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, and Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems
North Fulton Studio
Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, and Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, and Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems

Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, and Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems (ProfitSense with Bill McDermott, Episode 41)

On this episode of ProfitSense, host Bill McDermott welcomed three esteemed business leaders. Paul Zanardo, Zanardo Dezignz, discussed what sets his digital branding company apart, how his pricing is structured, how he gives back to the community, and more. Ed Mysogland, Indiana Business Advisors, shared how business owners can prepare for the greatest wealth transfer in history, what business owners should expect regarding sale values, what types of businesses sell, and much more. Finally, Jim Pursley, Factory Automation Systems, discussed his company’s process automation services for manufacturing, the company’s ownership transition in 2022, and more. Bill closed the show talking about setting a new vision in 2023.

ProfitSense with Bill McDermott is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.

Zanardo Dezignz

Zanardo Dezignz LLC is the Lawrenceville based professional service provider offering fully integrated digital branding solutions through website development, SEO, graphic design, printing, and digital marketing. Some of their clients include Above & Beyond Cabinetry LLC, K&J Mechanical, Joe Sells GA with Keller Williams, and Hickory’s Trail.

Website | Facebook | Instagram | LinkedIn | Twitter

Paul Zanardo, CEO / Founder, Zanardo Dezignz

Paul Zanardo, CEO / Founder, Zanardo Dezignz

Paul Zanardo is the CEO and founder of Zanardo Dezignz LLC. He has over 20 years of sales management and marketing experience at companies such as TruGreen and Luxottica with a proven track record of growth in the areas of marketing and new client revenue.

He excelled in these fields but often thought about how he could improve the overall customer experience and desired to spend more time with his family. After lots of prayer and soul searching, he decided to go back to school and get his degree in graphic design with a study in website development.

His company is now quickly approaching 8 years of serving his community as a professional service provider. His wife, Amy, is their lead graphic designer and content editor. She earned this position by helping him study for his degree and collaborating with him through the entire process. Their son Anthony is a sweet, creative 7-year-old that also aspires to own a creative business as well.

LinkedIn

Indiana Business Advisors

Indiana Business Advisors is a 41-year-old business brokerage representing small and mid-size businesses. It is the largest business brokerage in Indiana representing manufacturing, distribution, service, and construction-support businesses. To date, IBA has sold over 2200 businesses.

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter

Ed Mysogland, Managing Partner, Indiana Business Advisors

Ed Mysogland, Managing Partner, Indiana Business Advisors

Ed is a thirty year veteran of selling small and midsized companies. He has professional designations in business valuation, equipment appraising, and exit planning.

He has a weekly podcast, How to Sell a Business Podcast, where he interviews buyers, sellers, and advisors about making a business more valuable and saleable. Most recently, he has been preparing to launch BizSaleByOwner, an online marketplace with pay-for-service advisors to support the sale.

LinkedIn

 

 

Factory Automation Systems

Factory Automation Systems is a manufacturing controls systems integrator. They provide industrial automation and robotic solutions for top manufacturers in the US and world-wide.

Website | Facebook | LinkedIn

Jim Pursley, President, Factory Automation Systems

Jim Pursley, President, Factory Automation Systems

Jim Pursley is currently President of Factory Automation Systems (FAS). He joined FAS as co-op student in 1997. Since graduating from Georgia Tech in 2000, Jim has held various engineering, sales, and management roles.

In October of 2022, Jim and three business partners purchased FAS from the founders of the company.

LinkedIn

About ProfitSense and Your Host, Bill McDermott

Bill McDermott
Bill McDermott

ProfitSense with Bill McDermott dives into the stories behind some of Atlanta’s successful businesses and business owners and the professionals that advise them. This show helps local business leaders get the word out about the important work they’re doing to serve their market, their community, and their profession. The show is presented by McDermott Financial Solutions. McDermott Financial helps business owners improve cash flow and profitability, find financing, break through barriers to expansion, and financially prepare to exit their business. The show archive can be found at profitsenseradio.com.

Bill McDermott is the Founder and CEO of McDermott Financial Solutions. When business owners want to increase their profitability, they don’t have the expertise to know where to start or what to do. Bill leverages his knowledge and relationships from 32 years as a banker to identify the hurdles getting in the way and create a plan to deliver profitability they never thought possible.

Bill currently serves as Treasurer for the Atlanta Executive Forum and has held previous positions as a board member for the Kennesaw State University Entrepreneurship Center and Gwinnett Habitat for Humanity and Treasurer for CEO NetWeavers. Bill is a graduate of Wake Forest University and he and his wife, Martha have called Atlanta home for over 40 years. Outside of work, Bill enjoys golf, traveling, and gardening.

Connect with Bill on LinkedIn and Twitter and follow McDermott Financial Solutions on LinkedIn.

Tagged With: Bill McDermott, Ed Mysogland, Factory Automation Systems, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, Indiana Business Advisors, Jim Pursley, Paul Zanardo, profitability, profitability coach, Profitability Coach Bill McDermott, ProfitSense with Bill McDermott, SEO, The Profitability Coach, website design, Zanardo Dezignz

How To Maximize Your Value Using a Quality of Earnings Report, with Elliott Holland, Guardian Due Diligence

January 10, 2023 by John Ray

Quality of Earnings
How to Sell a Business
How To Maximize Your Value Using a Quality of Earnings Report, with Elliott Holland, Guardian Due Diligence
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Quality of Earnings

How To Maximize Your Value Using a Quality of Earnings Report, with Elliott Holland, Guardian Due Diligence (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 6)

Elliott Holland, Managing Partner of Guardian Due Diligence, joined host Ed Mysogland to discuss how a Quality of Earnings report maximizes the value of a business in a sale, reduces the risk of buyer objections, and helps secure completion of the transaction.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

Guardian Due Diligence

Guardian Due Diligence provides Quality of Earnings for Self-Funded Searchers. They have three options to choose from, including a “Done for You” financial diligence service.

Guardian’s 21 accountants are from the top 3% of CPAs from the past 15 years of interviewing.

How are they different & better? Alongside each Quality of Earnings, they advise their clients on how to execute better deals leveraging their 20+ years acquiring small and medium sized businesses. They are deal guys who manage accountants who help entrepreneurs buy better businesses.

Want to know if a CPA firm or a full-service diligence firm like Guardian is the right choice for you? Take their 5-question assessment here.

Company website | LinkedIn | YouTube

Elliott Holland, Managing Partner, Guardian Due Diligence

Elliott is an expert in the acquisition of small and medium sized businesses. He helps first-time buyers like you manage through the challenging and nuanced due diligence process. He’s been in this space since before they called it ETA. His burning desire is to take you through a comprehensive diligence process and guard you from expensive mistakes based on his vast experience in the deal business.

He’s worked for the nation’s best business acquisition firms like The Watermill Group and Linx Partners and then started his own acquisition firm where he apprenticed under an industry veteran. He hasn’t seen it all but he’s seen a lot. His Harvard MBA doesn’t hurt either.

Elliott started Guardian because the diligence solutions for smaller deals frankly stink. He created a better solution to help buyers avoid doing bad deals and help buyers execute deals with confidence. We all want confidence when making million-dollar investments.

He caught the acquisition bug in 2009 – his first year of business school, then worked in private equity (PE) in order to gain skills from the nation’s best business acquirers. Like you, Elliott started his own firm to go out and buy companies in the automotive, industrial, and healthcare space.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How to Sell a Business Podcast, where, every week, we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors, and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:36] On today’s show, I got to interview, and it was my pleasure and it really was, because I got to interview Elliott Holland. I’ve been following him on Twitter for quite some time, and he always has some thoughtful comments about due diligence, and in particular quality of earnings. And you may not know that term, but it’s becoming more and more prevalent in the deal making lexicon.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:04] And so, I think what you’ll find, and certainly I did, is just how important establishing quality of earnings is, whether you’re a buyer or seller or an institution, relying on financial data that’s being shared is imperative to the success of a deal. And Elliot – oh, my gosh – he shared so much and so many good stories about its application and the value that he brings to a transaction. So, I hope you enjoy my conversation with Elliott Holland of Guardian Due Diligence.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:44] I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. I help business owners learn what creates value in their business by interviewing people and advisors and buyers and sellers who have been in the trenches of acquiring and selling businesses.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:04] Today, you know, it’s going to be a special episode because one of the things that, in my world, we’re seeing more and more is a thing called QoE. And I have been following this guy along on Twitter for quite some time. His name is Elliott Holland. And you heard his bio before we got started. But he’s the guy for this work. And I have learned so much. And I’m certain you will, too. So, Elliott, welcome to the show.

Elliott Holland: [00:02:33] I’m glad to be here. It’s exciting information and I’m going to make it lively. We’re going to have some fun.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:38] Right on. Well, like I said, I talked a little bit about your background before we got started, but is there anything you want to talk just at high level about Guardian?

Elliott Holland: [00:02:49] Yeah. We do lower middle market and main street deals, I believe, better than anyone, because I come from the buy side where I used to be making acquisitions in that part of the market. And what I mean is sort of under $30 million in purchase price or enterprise value. And so, it’s not just an accounting firm with CPAs used to audit who are doing these analyses, but it’s a deal guy who used to sit for, work with, execute transactions, now managing a team of accountants. Which means that the report is not just a piece of paper, but I can actually explain to the client what’s important, what’s not, how are they going to use it. And I think that increases the value of the work product substantially.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:36] Well, one of the things that I was telling you before we got started is, a lot of people don’t know what QoE is, where it came from. And why now? Why are we seeing so much of it now? So, you might start from the beginning?

Elliott Holland: [00:03:53] Sure. So, in public deals, if I’m buying Coca-Cola, Pepsi, Home Depot, Ford, those companies get audited every single year by two top four accounting firms. So, when I go buy a share or if I want to buy the whole thing, there’s infinitely well-known financial information at all times on these companies.

Elliott Holland: [00:04:16] For small private companies, there is zero of that. There’s no audit requirement. I’m an owner. Other owners know this. Taxes are meant to be efficient and we make them very efficient. Financials are our best representation of what happened in the business.

Elliott Holland: [00:04:40] So, the quality of earnings is no more complicated than an audit-like tool to help owners, buyers, and advisors in these lower middle market deals understand the cash flow and the financials of a business, particularly ahead of a big transaction.

Elliott Holland: [00:04:59] So, why do they call it quality of earnings? The reason people call it quality of earnings is because businesses are valued off of a multiple of earnings. Earnings is no more complicated than profit. So, if you’re in business, depending on the size, you know, three to maybe ten or eleven times earnings is what you will fetch in a price.

Elliott Holland: [00:05:20] And so, for a buyer or a seller in a transaction, it’s very important to understand what the true earnings are, which means unraveling some of the good enough stuff that can be in financials of all owners to make it specific enough so a financially inclined buyer can very quickly get to the price of a business and pay owners the big checks that come with these deals.

Ed Mysogland: [00:05:49] So, I’m curious to know whether or not by doing this if risk changes.

Elliott Holland: [00:06:00] Tremendously.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:02] Right. So, a multiple just reflects risk. And I’m curious to know – and we’ll talk about it down the road here – how the conclusion of your services changes the risk profile of the acquisition target.

Elliott Holland: [00:06:24] Sure. So, my average deal is typically a sort of sub $5 million enterprise value transaction. But we do many deals that are up to $30 or 40 million. For most of my buyers, they are first time buyers. So, I work primarily for buyers buying companies, and 75 percent are first time buyers. So, they come into the market saying, “I want to buy a business. I think it’s a wise investment. I’m not a financial person. I see a lot of risk around this financial area I don’t understand.”

Elliott Holland: [00:07:04] And even my buyers who are very financial, private equity buyers, experienced buyers, they know that the packet of information they saw from the business owner or from the broker is going to be in a very favorable state. So, let’s just say tremendous risk because it’s a $5 million transaction. It’s $5 million worth of risk.

Elliott Holland: [00:07:24] After you do a quality of earnings and you know that the earnings, and so therefore the multiple you’re going to put on the earnings are within a very, like, small tolerance, the $5 million risk goes down to, I think, this is plus or minus 5 percent or 10 percent. So, now, we’re talking a-quarter-million dollars or a-half-million dollars of risk. And I could get more complex than that, but it goes from the full 100 percent of enterprise value to 5 or 10 percent or less.

Elliott Holland: [00:07:54] And so, now, as a buyer or my client, I’m not worried about should I do the deal or not. It’s should I ratchet the thing up or down a-quarter-million dollars? Should I structure it differently plus or minus a-quarter-million dollars? And that just puts everybody to sleep.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:09] Well, it’s not going up. If I’m with the buyer, it’s not going up.

Elliott Holland: [00:08:15] Well, that’s where your job is, Ed. I mean, I got to be honest, it all depends on the negotiation. I have seen it go both ways. But yeah, for my clients I would not mean negotiating for the up on that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:28] You know, one thing that comes to mind – and I know I’m going out of order of kind of my talking points – I’m curious to know whether or not does doing a quality of earnings report, if I’m a buyer and I’m using SBA financing, does this count as buyer’s equity toward the transaction? That’s a real interesting dynamic if I’m the buyer and I can apply this to my deal.

Elliott Holland: [00:09:00] So, my understanding is it doesn’t apply to equity. However, about half of my clients end up paying for the quality of earnings service through the transaction. So, they added on as an expense a cost in the transaction so that when the transaction goes for 5 million, they may tack on an extra couple of hundred grand for expenses and you can pay that fee through the deal.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:27] Yeah. I get it.

Elliott Holland: [00:09:30] Well, here we go even further. So, to your point, Ed, and I didn’t see through it as quickly. Sorry, man.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:37] It’s early.

Elliott Holland: [00:09:38] You’re wiser than me. Yeah, I need another cup of coffee.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:41] I doubt it.

Elliott Holland: [00:09:41] If I’m a buyer and I pay for the quality of earnings, so I pay the 20 or 30 grand for a quality of earnings out of pocket. And then, I get reimbursed for that because I do that quite often and the transaction pays my provider. Then, essentially, that money that I would have paid out of pocket I can now put into the deal as equity. So, effectively you do move an out of pocket expense to equity. Yes.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:07] Well, I’m just curious because if I’m a buyer and if I can apply this, you know, scrutinizing what I’m buying to my equity as opposed to tacking it on, on the backend, I would have to imagine the SBA and the powers that be would find that a favorable strategy by most buyers.

Elliott Holland: [00:10:30] And here’s what happens that people don’t recognize. So, over half the deals – I’m just going to say your, Ed, as if you’re the buyer – your SBA lender is calling me early and saying, “What’s up with this? What did this mean? Why is this represented here in the financials?” So, what happens when there’s not a quality of earnings in your deal?

Elliott Holland: [00:10:58] What it means is your bankers are making up negative answers to all these questions and docking either the price of your deal, the interest rate, the speed of your deal, how quickly it can get closed, or whether they want to do your deal at all. And so, I think there’s the equity piece of it, but it’s also the SBA does not always require a quality of earnings. Sometimes they do. But even when they don’t, the reality is the SBA can ingest a quality of earnings so much easier than the typical stack of financials from a private business.

Ed Mysogland: [00:11:35] So, do you have any kind of exposure for doing this kind of work? I mean, I’ve got to imagine, you know, just your normal errors and omissions and negligence kind of thing, right?

Elliott Holland: [00:11:47] Yeah. I think there’s two or three types of exposure. I think there’s the absolute legal exposure. And that is, in my engagement letter, I clearly state that there’s no way in 30 days I’m going to get to the bottom of 30 years of financials for 0.1 or 1 percent of the transaction value. I will do my best given what the clients are willing to pay for. So, that’s kind of the strict legal liability.

Elliott Holland: [00:12:17] Then, there’s like the document liability. So, this document travels, your lender sees it, your equity investors see it. And the first two pages kind of say, “Hey, look. We did these procedures, but we didn’t do these procedures. So, you should understand that had we done more procedures, we would have gotten a more accurate answer.”

Elliott Holland: [00:12:36] Then, I think there’s reputational risk, which is, if you start doing poor work and you’re in the market as often as I am, people start questioning your work, and then the value of the work diminishes. So, there’s liability.

Elliott Holland: [00:12:53] And it’s also, for me, I’m an entrepreneur, I’ve been on the buy side, now I’m an advisor. All of my clients are putting up over $1,000,000 based on my advice, I take all of that seriously.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:05] A hundred percent. And I’m with you. And my point from the exposure standpoint was procedurally. I mean, as an appraiser, I conform to USPAP, the Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice. I got to adhere to this is how I build a report or how I can deviate. So, I was just curious to know the process and where does the level of assurance stop for someone like you? You know what I mean?

Elliott Holland: [00:13:44] Sure. Yeah. No, I do. That’s a great question. Here’s what I would say, and I’ve been an expert witness on cases where fraud has been claimed in transactions against other QoE providers and testified to the help that a quality of earnings provides, but that is not a silver bullet solution. The assurance level is a lot of times tied to how good your provider is and how many procedures you have done, which typically also implies a cost.

Elliott Holland: [00:14:24] So, what I would say after doing this for almost 15 years, you know, for most providers, if you get a good referral, you’re going to get at least like a C valuable piece of analysis. If you are sort of financially inclined or you get someone who has really good ratings, you’re probably at a B level. I think to get to an A level, you really just need to be sure the procedures that you’re getting done match the risk in the business that you’re buying.

Elliott Holland: [00:14:57] So, like, a business with a lot of inventory, you need to make sure that your provider is good with inventory. For a business that has, you know, upfront payments for quarterly services, you need to make sure that that provider understands prepays and unearned revenue. And when you get to that level – and here’s where I love entrepreneurship and acquisition because it doesn’t have to be audit accuracy – you just need to know is the business earning plus or minus 5 percent relative to what you thought, given all the risks you know as a buyer and the multiple you apply to the business.

Elliott Holland: [00:15:37] So, within that sort of 5 percent – and I’m using five, maybe it’s three or seven – I think any good provider can get to that level of insurance minus, what I would say, 1 percent that are out there, that if someone’s been spending 25 years to be fraudulent in their financials, you have to be wary that some things are just really hard to catch.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:01] A hundred percent. Yeah. So, what is the process? I mean, I’m certain some people had reviews and audits, but what generally is the process for a quality of earnings report?

Elliott Holland: [00:16:17] Sure. So, we’ll send out a due diligence list that has information about the financials. It’ll have bank statements, we’ll ask for those, financials, taxes, payroll statements, and other pieces of data inventory lists, org charts. And what we do in our process is sort of triangulate data through different sources of the same information.

Elliott Holland: [00:16:41] So, what does that mean, Elliot? So, on a recent deal, ecommerce business in the Midwest. So, their revenue is coming through their financial statements. You can see revenue. It’s the deposits in their bank statement. Not a lot of transfers. And it’s represented on their taxes, net of tax stuff that you can do from that perspective. It’s also in their operating system from sales aggregated across all their customers. So, now I’ve got four different areas to see revenue.

Elliott Holland: [00:17:12] And what I do is, you know, there’s typically always two to four areas where I can get any particular number of importance. And we’re triangulating the data to see if all the different pieces of information are saying the same thing. And when they don’t or when they’re a little off, we start asking questions to dig into more data to validate. When they all say the same thing, we feel more confident that they’re accurate.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:33] I got it. So, I’m assuming everybody that you work with tends to use virtual data rooms.

Elliott Holland: [00:17:45] Oh, yeah.

Ed Mysogland: [00:17:45] I can only fathom, you know, here I’m going to start emailing you all of that.

Elliott Holland: [00:17:51] Although, I have to tell a funny story. When I started years ago on the buy side, I had a partner who was in his upper 50s and the buyers can be, you know, at their retirement age. And the guy was like, “All right. Well, what’s your address?” “Like, what?” “Oh, you want me to send all this data, what’s your address so I can send it?” And I’m on the phone, I’m like, “Flash drive.” And my partner is like, “No, Elliot. He wants to send all the financial through the mail so you can scan them.” So, every once in a while, you get an old school situation. Ninety-nine percent of the time virtual data room.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:29] So, I know when we have been faced with quality of earnings or someone has requested it, everybody’s like, “Well, I’ve got a CPA.” So, tell me the difference. You know, how do you respond to that? Because you are a CPA, right?

Elliott Holland: [00:18:55] I’m not.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:56] No, your team is.

Elliott Holland: [00:18:57] I have 20 plus that work for me. I’m a Harvard MBA, so people tend to give me a pass. I know a little bit about it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:03] Yeah. You know your way around the books.

Elliott Holland: [00:19:05] So, I tend to use an example in their industry. So, I’ll say, “You know, divorce attorneys could do your contracts in your business, but do you have a divorce attorney doing your contracts? And estate planning folks could draw up your real estate trust, but is that who you have do it? I mean, a runner in the 100 meters could also run a marathon, would you bet on 100 meter sprinters to do your marathon? Now, would the person know general how to run a race? Sure.”

Elliott Holland: [00:19:42] But what ends up happening is, and this is my general point of view on this, there’s always the cost basis bottoms up. Like, why would I spend any incremental dollar on anything, which is the entrepreneur’s first disposition. But I push them on bottoms down. So, this is a $20 million paycheck and they’re squabbling over 20,000 bucks, 0.1 percent.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:04] But they do. And you sit there and you’re like, “How in the world?” And, again, understanding that the business owner likely has pinched and saved and scrimped and made those types of decisions. And it doesn’t matter how many zeros it is, it’s just the prospect I’m spending money.

Elliott Holland: [00:20:32] Ed, I think when I started Guardian, I used to lay out the logical based argument. And I started realizing, like, who am I talking to? These are people who have, in a rugged way, made their own decisions their whole career. And then, what I started doing is making one or two statements.

Elliott Holland: [00:20:51] So, say, a person is doing HVAC. I’m like, “Oh. Well, I can just get my plumber handyman to do my AC system in my new house.” And I tend to just stop now. And, typically, the person will argue why it’s too expensive, rah, rah, rah. And then, a huge portion will come back a couple of days later when they have had a chance to think about it and realize the error in their ways. And that was one random example.

Elliott Holland: [00:21:20] But people who are experts in their craft, it’s like, “Hey. You’ve been doing professional excavating services for 30 years. How about I go get a guy that’s been out for two years to do the same job? What would you say to me about that?”

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:37] A hundred percent. And I do something similar. I sit there and, like, I’ve never gone wrong going first rate no matter what I’ve bought. And it’s the same thing here, but the risk is so much greater. And it’s astounding that you would even consider going on the cheap when there’s so much at stake.

Elliott Holland: [00:22:01] Ed, I can’t tell you how many times this year somebody went with a cheaper QoE provider or their own financial analysis or somebody’s best friend’s cousin CPA or accountant, wink, wink, with no designation. And then, 30 days before they closed, they’re ringing me, “Hey, man. Can you fix all this crap that I screwed up?” And it’s always like, “Hey, I just got this one question about working capital.” And I get on the phone with them, it’s like, “No. Your whole analysis is off, buddy. And you’re supposed to close in 30 days.”

Elliott Holland: [00:22:36] And I think some folks believe that, “Hey, I’ll go as far as I can with X resource, and then if I get stuck, I can always – ” no. Ed, you make sure these deals move at a healthy pace. And when the pace starts slowing down for any reason in these deals, everybody starts getting nervous. But they’re not getting nervous about $20,000. They’re getting nervous about my $20 million check that I don’t think buyer X has the money or – what we call – the heart to bring to the table. And now you’ve created $20 million worth of risk buyer by skimping on $20,000.

Elliott Holland: [00:23:16] The other reality is a third of my clients, Ed, are probably smarter than me in this stuff, investment bankers, private equity folks, industry experts. But in a 60 to 90 day process to close, they need to go understand the seller, get to know the seller, get to know the operations, get to know the industry better, find a house in this new area, convince their family, wife, and kids to move. And their highest and best use isn’t sitting in a bunch of financials doing accounting work.

Ed Mysogland: [00:23:46] Yeah. Well, the funny thing is that you sit there and you’re like, “How is it that you do not see this? If you can minimize risk, why wouldn’t you do that?”

Elliott Holland: [00:24:01] I think I have a hypothesis.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:04] Hit it.

Elliott Holland: [00:24:05] Because people always call different folks in this business unsophisticated. Ed, you’ve heard it. Brokers, sellers, buyers, everybody is stupid. No. I think everybody goes by their incentives even when they’re skewed. I think a lot of owners have minimized their payment to accountants and lawyers for 30 years. And they have not paid a cent more than what they absolutely have had to in these areas where an extra 1,000 bucks or 3,000 bucks in any given year could have minimized $10,000 or 100,000 worth of risk.

Elliott Holland: [00:24:45] And so, they’ve got no way with those $1,000 lack of investments and maybe I have $3,000 of risk or 10,000. Now, it’s a $20 million deal and nobody calibrated that the new risk on the table was 20 million. The maximum risk most business owners have is the sum of their profit for that year. Now, it’s not the sum of the profit. It’s four, six, eight times that. And I think people just don’t recalibrate.

Ed Mysogland: [00:25:11] Oh, so far that might be the best thing that’s come out of your mouth. That’s a good one, because you’re right. I mean, most business owners look at this kind of work – not this kind of work – their CPA and attorney, it’s a toll booth. I got to pay to get to the other side. Now, it’s, no, we’re sizing up risk. This is quantifying and justifying the risk associated with your business and the earnings, obviously, that go along with it.

Elliott Holland: [00:25:42] Or something like this, how much would you pay? And people don’t do this, but if there was a service to really get, like, a ten year go forward read on a potential business partner or some other thing of that huge magnitude – I won’t talk about other partnerships with personal nature – but if you could actually really do this level of work, most of those things don’t have anyone or don’t have data at the level that you do in this.

Elliott Holland: [00:26:09] I think the other thing that gets people caught up, Ed, is they have lost faith in their accountant, but they’re still paying them. And they may not tell you that. They’re definitely not going to tell my client, the buyer, that. Their accountant may not even know that. But a huge portion of my friends that owned businesses call me because they’re trying to figure out whether a quality of earnings will help straighten out their accounting stacks.

Elliott Holland: [00:26:36] So, they’re paying a couple of grand, 10 grand, 20 grand a year for the stack of accountants that they still don’t trust. And so, now you’re asking the owner to pay another sum of money to a group of people who have messed up their trust over years. And I think that may be a secondary reason that we don’t pry into enough around why folks try to skimp on this, what I would almost call, mission critical service.

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:02] And the funny thing is, I guess the way I was looking at it is I just don’t understand that – for example, a couple of weeks ago, my kid, she was having abdominal pain. And I didn’t ask how much it was costing. I wanted to make sure whatever was wrong with her was going to get fixed.

Elliott Holland: [00:27:31] You had a better example than me. Do you go to a head doctor about your abdomen? Do you go to a foot doctor about your heart?

Ed Mysogland: [00:27:39] Right. Well, I don’t know if it was better, but I was thinking about from a cost standpoint – oh, my gosh – it mattered nothing. All I wanted to do was make sure that whatever happened to her, she was okay. And the same thing from a deal standpoint that if this is the deal you want, you should be willing to pay in order to ensure that you’re getting the deal that you think you’re getting.

Elliott Holland: [00:28:06] Well, let me tell you a couple of examples, because I think people love stories. So, I had a client about a year ago. This was a sell side quality of earnings. So, this is where I was working for a person who was selling their company and they had had a friend who was in private equity who said, “Dude, you do not want to be fighting the equivalent of me without your numbers buttoned up. Go get a guy to do quality of earnings. I know this guy Elliot of Guardian.”

Elliott Holland: [00:28:30] So, we’re doing his work and he was gunning for a certain EBITDA mark because somebody had given him above 10X multiple. I mean, he was going to get paid, you know, $30 million plus for this business. And he was kind of meandering through with a slow bookkeeper, and limited access, and didn’t want to make himself available.

Elliott Holland: [00:28:53] And then, we got closer to the end of the year and instead of this $3 million EBITDA mark he thought he was going to hit, it was almost questions of whether the efficacy of his whole accounting stack was even reliable. So, now he’s like, “Well, I just need to get a number so I can get these private equity folks to give me a valuation.” And then, he has a conversation with one of the private equity buyers and he’s like, “Look, Elliot. If I can just get this to $2.1 million of EBITDA, they’ll still pay me the above 10X multiple and I can get this thing done in 30 days.”

Elliott Holland: [00:29:24] In that case, had that person just been real about their true situation, gotten their numbers in order quickly and been more available, they would have gotten a bigger paycheck sooner.

Elliott Holland: [00:29:36] Let me tell you another example. So, on the buyer side representing a buying client, and a good advisor on the sell side would never do this. It was a Canadian company operating probably 100 miles north of the U.S. Canadian border. But they had financials and, of course, Canadian dollars and they had reported to the Canadian equivalent of IRS.

Elliott Holland: [00:30:02] Well, this broker thought it was a wise idea to instead of asked a Canadian accountant to do a U.S. dollar set of books, to ask a brand new friendly to the business brokerage U.S.- based accounting firm to completely redo the books, not using the old books as a basis, but going back to bank statements. What they said was invoices and the rest. So, initially, we’re thinking, “Oh, it’s just two versions of the same truth.” No. These financials were completely different. And oh, by the way, the U.S.-based firm hired by the brokerage had left out 35 percent of the expenses, such that EBITDA was affected by a bigger percentage than that.

Elliott Holland: [00:30:47] And so, when we’re looking at them apples to apples, just Canadian to U.S. dollars, they’re 40 percent off. Now, here’s the issue with that. Now, do I believe the Canadian version, the U.S. dollar version, or something else? Now, you have seller, broker, Canadian account, U.S. account on the same phone call, and none of them can say, “Hey, the other person is lying.”

Elliott Holland: [00:31:14] And so, for my buyer, what they earned by paying for their quality of earnings was they walked away from a $5 million catastrophe. I mean, those folks would have been able to tell him cash basis accounting, accrual basis accounting, Canadians, the U.S. dollar, Forex adjustments, EBITDA adjustments. They could have ran circles around my client with enough excuses than any person that was reasonably going through the process would have given up. But the quality of earnings said, “Hey, there’s no way this set of financials and this one can be true at the same time. Stop.”

Elliott Holland: [00:31:54] And so, that’s what people are actually buying. They’re buying how do I get my behind out of $5 million, $10 million of risk. Or as a seller, how do I keep my $5 million or $20 million check coming without a bunch of shenanigans.

Ed Mysogland: [00:32:12] Yeah. Oh, man. Did you ever follow it? Did it ever close? Not necessarily with your client, but did it ever close ever?

Elliott Holland: [00:32:21] I’m almost scared to ask because I’d have to call the brokerage.

Ed Mysogland: [00:32:25] I get it. I get it.

Elliott Holland: [00:32:26] And my client didn’t buy it, I’d say that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:32:29] Well, so I’ve got four CPAs on staff here. And the funny thing is they all run around and say the CPA is the most trusted advisor to the business owner, and there’s statistics about that. But at the same time I think an accountant has a lane. And I hate to dump my accountants in with generalists, but I think there’s specialists in this kind of accounting.

Elliott Holland: [00:33:13] Ed, you’re so right.

Ed Mysogland: [00:33:15] I’m getting ready to jam it to them. This isn’t for you. This is for me. Because I’m going to walk down and I’m going to say you may be the trusted advisor for QuickBooks, but – I’m just kidding.

Elliott Holland: [00:33:27] That’s it. For QuickBooks, for taxes, for valuation opinions, for audits, absolutely. But accountants and lawyers have terrible abilities to process any non-zero risk.

Elliott Holland: [00:33:44] At the top of the call, I said I’m a deal guy entrepreneur who manages accountants. So, what that says is I manage a group of people who cannot do well with any non-zero risk. And I’m a person who I’m used to paying, you know, $2 and dealing with a dollar or two of risk.

Elliott Holland: [00:34:04] And so, I think when they come to this trusted advisor piece, I think what accountants, lawyers, and other conservative compliance based advisors miss, is, a lot of business is taking risks and there’s not really an advisor that can help people understand risk.

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:21] Yeah. And as we’ve been in our sell side work – and I’m the Grim Reaper of business valuation – we sit down and we talk about this is the mechanics of how this deal is going to work just on a high level. You’ve got to warm up to the fact that these are the risk areas and someone is going to scrutinize them and suppress your value. That’s just the way the program works. So, you have a choice. You can go back and fix it and reduce that risk and then come back to the market. Or, you can go to the market and understand how the buyer is going to see it. And, to me, that is at least on the frontend.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:07] And where I’m heading with this is, if I’m a sell side person – and we started to talk about this earlier – if I can minimize the backend re-trade after your work is done, why wouldn’t I do that? I mean, your fees, I’m certain they get scoped depending on the size and complexity. But generally speaking, I have to assume that whatever I’m going to pay is going to be less than the consequence of the re-trade on the backend, I have to imagine.

Elliott Holland: [00:35:43] Oh, by orders of magnitude. So, very quickly – and I’m sure you tell people this all the time – let me walk through a typical process of selling to private equity. They come in, they give valuations, and they know they’re competing with other firms so they’re going to give the most favorable valuation that they think that they can actually stand up and not laugh about to get the deal locked up. And they’re going to say subject to due diligence.

Elliott Holland: [00:36:10] They’re going to know that most often their team of due diligence providers, both on staff and folks like me that work for them, are going to be way more sophisticated, have way more time, are going to be better at finding nuanced things and talking about the risk of them than the seller’s representation will be typically only because of manpower. So then, they’re going to start not just finding real things, which I think any of us would say, “Hey, we should find the real stuff.”

Elliott Holland: [00:36:36] But what private equity will often do is to start nickel and diming about stuff and doing things like, “Well, when I thought the top customer was 15 percent, I was okay. But now, they’re 17-1/2 and I’m having trepidations about this. And I need to go back to my committee and see if we can still -” and it’s bull crap. But what it does is it delays the deal two weeks and you’re talking about 2.5 percent of your revenue as if it was, you know, God coming to Earth and then putting in some stones and breaking them apart.

Elliott Holland: [00:37:11] And then, also, what’s happening is, it can be a situation where a deal closes or doesn’t close, not because of real risk on a real deal, but because somebody was allowed to talk themselves out of a deal over some funky nuance thing that didn’t really matter.

Elliott Holland: [00:37:27] Let me talk about a different process for seller gets quality of earnings. It’s almost like airing your dirty laundry before the thing starts. So, it’s like, “Hey, I’m 30 pounds overweight. I’m probably going to have gout in my foot in a couple of weeks. I snore when I sleep. And here’s the stuff that you need to know.”

Ed Mysogland: [00:37:50] “Don’t you love me? You still got to love me. That’s who I am.”

Elliott Holland: [00:37:54] That’s who I am. But I make good money. I’m consistent. I go to church every Sunday. I take care of my kids. I’m funny. Look at all these great people that spoken about me. So, here’s the packet of real information. Do you want to deal with me or not?

Elliott Holland: [00:38:10] And in the business context, what that does for the seller is, here’s the money I’ve spent to give you a clear look at my business. Here’s the revenue by customer. Here’s how our income statement should look, how the balance sheet should look. So, now, when that same private equity buyer comes and says, “Oh, well. I thought it was 15 percent and it really was 17-1/2.” We say, “Oh, no. We said we were doing this deal on an accrual basis. The accrual basis is 15 percent. If you’re telling me a 17.5 on a cash basis, then we’re blowing up the whole deal because you’re going against your contract. Is that what you’re telling me, Mr. Private Equity Guy?”

Elliott Holland: [00:38:48] And so, we are $20,000 to 30,000 without having to do any incremental work on a Tuesday. And when you got some crazy call, you push them right back to the page in the analysis like, “No. You knew this going in.” And it makes it so much easier for, like, my sell side QoE clients, their process can go so quick because they already have the playbook.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:10] Well, that was one of my questions, is, how much faster does it go when you can have this as an amendment or an addendum to your SIM and you just hand it? I mean, I got to imagine it goes substantially.

Elliott Holland: [00:39:24] Tremendously quicker. And it’s months. Here’s why. I had two deals in this past year where I get called, “Hey, I’m going to be selling my business later this year. I think I want to, but I’m not sure, blah, blah, blah. I’m going to try to go it alone. I already got a buyer that sent me a letter of intent. We’ve signed up. We’re good to go. We’re good to go.”

Elliott Holland: [00:39:47] So, I’ve marked the calendar because it always comes back. And it’s like, “Okay. So, how long is your deal, 60 days? Cool. Got it.” So, day 50, I’m like, “Hey, how’s the deal going?” “Oh. Well, they found this all. Oh. Well, they found that. Their quality of earnings said this. They said my income statement is totally that.” And then, they’re like, “Hey, man. I should have got you in. Can you come in here now and do something?”

Elliott Holland: [00:40:10] And the reality is, some of those times I am able to get in there and help kind of reconcile sort of buy side QoE to sell side QoE and get all the stuff going. But here’s what the delay is, so out of the 60 days, 30 days into the 60, somebody said, “I smell something I don’t like.” So, now they stop their 60 day process at 30 days. And until you justify that what they thought going into the deal is actually true, that deal doesn’t pick back up. So, that may be two months, four months.

Elliott Holland: [00:40:43] And oh, by the way, here’s how deal psychology works. If I think I’m buying A grade property on Park Avenue and I find out that there’s one leak in one bathroom on the third floor, now I want to check everything as a buyer. So, you’ve given me carte blanche. And that’s why those deals slow. It can be two, three, four months, six months quicker when you do the work upfront.

Ed Mysogland: [00:41:09] So, if I’m a seller, I mean, how long does a QoE – what’s the shelf life?

Elliott Holland: [00:41:15] So, that’s a great question. Probably a year, but let me tell you why. It’ll take us 30 days to do. Let’s say I had a full data room today. And that just means access to your QuickBooks, taxes, bank statements, which somebody should be able to get in 24 hours. Let’s say I do the quality of earnings. That’s a 30 day process, one month. What the quality of earnings does is it goes back three years.

Elliott Holland: [00:41:45] So, as a buyer, let’s say I get a quality of earnings through November of 2022. A couple of those I just finished. It can be June of 2023. What I know is through November of 2022, the numbers were good. And all I need to do now is check December through June. Let’s say, I go all the way to next October. What I know is through November 2022, the numbers are good. I know all the adjustments. I know all the ways, the way a buyer according to GAAP would look at the business is different than how they recorded in their QuickBooks. So, it can sit on shelves for a year or more.

Elliott Holland: [00:42:27] When I was a buyer I would see – and you’ve seen this all the time – there’s a data packet that was done in November of 2022. They had projections for the full year, 2022. And it’s November of 2023 and you’re still looking at the same data. So, that gives you a year of coverage for that one fee. And, also, we do roll forwards for cost. So, I’ve got a couple of guys where each month we do a roll for and we just charge them time and materials.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:53] I get you. Well, and that’s what I was saying, so I’m looking at, say, it’s from engagement to close, let’s say, average six to nine months. And at the beginning of the process, how does somebody do this and have the assurance that it’s still good when I get to the backend of this. I get it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:17] Well, I want to be sensitive to your time, so just tell me, I guess – I don’t want to say the elevator pitch, but tell me about Guardian, all the stuff that you’re doing, where you’re doing it, how someone can work with you. All the things that I should have asked you before.

Elliott Holland: [00:43:38] No. So, we made this business to be the most transparent, easy to work with firm out there because none of our clients have time to play around. Our sell side clients are making a bunch of money. Our buy side clients have a bunch of money to invest, so they need to be able to deal with us quickly.

Elliott Holland: [00:43:54] So, you can go to guardianduediligence.com or type in Google, Elliott Holland or Guardian Due Diligence, or anything close. I think I’ve done enough work on Google to get me up there first. And on our website, you can see all about me. You can download our sample reports. You can not only see what services we do, but we have our prices transparently stated on our site, so there’s no guesswork there. You can set up a call with me or you can tell me to call you within 24 hours, all on my website.

Elliott Holland: [00:44:25] In terms of how we function and different, I mentioned that we bring sort of a deal lens to quality of earnings and accounting products. So, what that means is whether you’re a sell side owner or a buy side investor, I’ll be speaking to you because I still talk to each of my clients as a risk understanding individual talking to you about an accounting service that I help you make a business decision.

Elliott Holland: [00:44:49] And then, I think particularly for your audience, Ed, we wanted to do something special. So, we have a 25 percent discount for anybody who’s listening to this podcast or you end up referring to us. And I think what that is to do is just, you know, it’s one thing to say, “Hey, it’s worth your investment to do my service.” What I’m saying is I’m willing to invest 25 percent if you’re willing to put up the other 75 percent, and let’s protect your $10 million and do the right thing.

Ed Mysogland: [00:45:17] That’s sweet of you. And I really do appreciate it. And I’m sure the audience does too. And I jumped ahead and I shouldn’t have and I’m not going to make you say it all over again. But one of the things, we started talking about the SBA, SOPs, and the business valuations. And having done them for years, you know, way back early in the career, I mean, does it pay for itself? Does it pay a salary? CapEx? And do I get the debt coverage ratio? To me, I read a statistic, like, 97 percent of the business valuations that are done actually make it.

Elliott Holland: [00:46:10] Right. Eureka.

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:11] Yeah. Imagine that.

Elliott Holland: [00:46:14] Which is way smaller than the percentage of deals that don’t do well. So, what happened?

Ed Mysogland: [00:46:17] Right. And that’s where I’m heading with this, I mean, do you ever foresee that this becomes kind of the standard of deal making? You know what I mean?

Elliott Holland: [00:46:30] I think it will. I think what’s happening, Ed, is it used to be the buyers and the sellers were all millionaires. And so, people didn’t feel so bad about either one of them losing money, particularly the buyers. And the banks, if you lend 100 bucks, you’re only going to do it if somebody on the equity side is putting up, you know, 50 bucks. So, typically, the banks could look at a private equity firm, a very well capitalized, known capitalized entity to say they’re backstopping.

Elliott Holland: [00:47:05] In 2022, we’re getting a lot of independent sponsors, independent business buyers, search funders, and the rest that are coming into the market. And so, these lenders, they may still get, you know, 20 percent equity, but it’s from a single person who can declare bankruptcy, who can be hard to collect from, who you don’t know how well capitalized they are.

Elliott Holland: [00:47:27] So, I think what’s going to happen is SBA and other lenders over time are going to say, “Hey, look. We used to be able to not worry about QoEs for deals under 20 million, 30 million. But now, why would we not put ourselves behind the eight ball to not require these things.” And oh, by the way, they take too much time for a bank to do on every deal they look at because the bank only does some portion of those deals. Let somebody else manage their take on that risk so that when we get at the bank, it’s a clean set of financials, it’s cleanly knowing what’s up. And we can make better credit decisions as a lender and less risk.

Elliott Holland: [00:48:09] And I think the other piece that’s come in, Ed, we’re getting so much better data as online systems and tax systems get aggregated and people are AI and everything. How can you go by these old school standards and not take into account some of this data that’s available?

Ed Mysogland: [00:48:27] A hundred percent Well, and the point of the question was, I mean, at least two times a year, we got a commitment letter from a bank that said, “Oh, by the way, you’re going to supply us a QoE.” And we hadn’t seen that before and we’ve been doing it a long time.

Elliott Holland: [00:48:44] Well, I’ll tell you this, on Twitter you’ve seen it. I wasn’t a fan of Twitter. I thought it was all fake. And some buddies in the small and medium business world said, “Hey, there’s a whole community here you got to check out.” So, I got on Twitter a little under a year ago. And when I first got on, the general consensus was you don’t need to do QoEs on deals under 2 million bucks, 5 million bucks, and purchase price. And that’s what everybody was saying.

Elliott Holland: [00:49:11] And I kept asking people, “So, who out here can lose a million bucks?” Who out here can lose a million bucks? Can you lose a million bucks, particularly when it’s personally guaranteed, personally you got your family’s house, your kid. You can’t even take your kid to the abdomen doctor because you got to pay the bank. And now the top lenders have also said you need to get a QoE. So, they’ve said it in terms of their favorable and that’s what they desire.

Elliott Holland: [00:49:37] I think soon it’s going to get written into standards because here’s the other thing, Ed, and you know this. A novice will call a banker a financial expert. But a banker that most people interact with is a salesperson who works at a bank. So, they’re not super financially inclined like my CPAs are. And so, I think as that information starts getting out and people start realizing that some of the promises bankers are making are only to the depth of their financial understanding, they’ll start realizing, I need to protect myself.

Ed Mysogland: [00:50:10] Well, and at the same time, I mean, as a taxpayer, if you’re lending my taxpayer money for somebody to buy a business, I don’t want you to default. I mean, as a taxpayer, am I really grateful for the cost of capital and thumbs up all the way? You know, as a deal maker, thumbs up. As a taxpayer, it’s like, oh, man. I really would like some assurances.

Elliott Holland: [00:50:38] I don’t want people taking risks with my money. And, you know, right now the SBA is only requiring a 10 percent equity. So, 90 percent debt on all these deals. And the government is back in guaranteeing 90 percent of that. You’re absolutely right, I don’t want to do that on speculative transactions. I want to do that on homeruns on sure things.

Ed Mysogland: [00:50:59] All day long. All right. Well, as I finish this thing up, I always ask everybody one final question. So, what is the one piece of advice you could give listeners that would have the most immediate impact on their business?

Elliott Holland: [00:51:13] You know, so I got to say something that’s related to my business and not general. But I would say, don’t be cheap on a $10 million transaction. Just go home and think about all the times that you were cheap on a transaction way bigger than the other ones you typically do and how did that work out. Not well. Buyer, seller, anyone. When you’re doing stuff of this magnitude, make sure you get it right.

Ed Mysogland: [00:51:43] So, you shared a little bit about where we can find you. I’ll make sure that’s in the show notes. You know, I’ve been following you a long time – well, certainly the last year. And, you know, it was just great to talk with you, man. I appreciate you going way over time, but I really enjoyed it and I’m certain the listeners will, too.

Elliott Holland: [00:52:08] Ed, I’ve enjoyed this. You can hear it on my voice I love what I do. These stories aren’t just accounting spreadsheet things. These people’s real lives, real money. And I built this thing to help people get paid on these deals, but also make wise investments, and I stand by that every day that we go to work. So, I’m excited to work for any and all of you and serve you in your transactions. And I’m glad you gave me a chance to be on this podcast.

Ed Mysogland: [00:52:36] Oh, man. You’re the real deal. You never really know, but you absolutely blew it out of the water, so I appreciate your time.

Elliott Holland: [00:52:46] Thank you, Ed.

Outro: [00:52:48] Thank you for joining us today on the How to Sell a Business Podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

Tagged With: audit, business acquisition, business brokerage, Business Owners, business value, due diligence, Ed Mysogland, How to Sell a Business, How to Sell a Business Podcast, how to sell your business, multiples, quality of earnings report, revenue, valuations

How to Modernize Your Business to Sell at Maximum Value, with Jason Beutler, RoboSource

January 3, 2023 by John Ray

RoboSource
How to Sell a Business
How to Modernize Your Business to Sell at Maximum Value, with Jason Beutler, RoboSource
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

RoboSource

How to Modernize Your Business to Sell at Maximum Value, with Jason Beutler, RoboSource (How To Sell a Business Podcast, Episode 5)

Jason Beutler, CEO of RoboSource, joined Ed Mysogland to discuss various kinds of business automation, why RoboSource uses bots, what’s involved in automating processes, what industries benefit from it most, how it maximizes value and reduces overhead, the return on investment, and much more.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton Studio of Business RadioX® in Atlanta.

RoboSource

RoboSource bots work 24 hours a day, completing monotonous tasks for their clients.

Process Automation is the future of work. Soon every business will have a digital workforce alongside its human workforce. Automated processes get work through faster, more efficiently, and more accurately.

So what is process automation? Think of all the jobs around the office that your team has to complete every day (or week) to keep the business operational – things like entering information into multiple systems, manning email inboxes, pulling down the same information from a website over and over again. With Robotic Process Automation (RPA), software engineers teach digital bots how to perform those jobs for you.

RoboSource can provide process-writing and support for those using RPA on premises. But with their “as-a-service” model, they can also do it all in house, for a low monthly payment, eliminating the usual expense associated with investing in the infrastructure, software, and training. Your cloud-based solution will scale with you, as you find new ways to save time and increase accuracy.

With their “as-a-service” model, process automation is more affordable than you’d think.

Company website | Instagram | LinkedIn

Jason Beutler, CEO, RoboSource

Jason Beutler, CEO, RoboSource

Several years ago, Jason Beutler was teaching a college computer engineering class when he realized that his students were writing better code than an outsourced team he was supervising at the same time. And that’s how RoboSource was born.

With almost 20 years of professional programming experience, you might expect Jason to spend his free time reading fantasy fiction, playing board games, or drinking Mountain Dew. He does. But he also spends a fair amount of time playing competitive sand volleyball and fanning hard-core at Notre Dame football games. His passion for Notre Dame extended to completing his MBA there in 2009.

Professionally, Jason is passionate about process improvement and using accountability to grow young developers. He speaks often on this topic, to audiences as diverse as coding conference attendees, classes full of university students, and computer science educators.

LinkedIn

Ed Mysogland, Host of How To Sell a Business Podcast

Ed Mysogland, Host of “How To Sell a Business”

The How To Sell a Business Podcast combines 30 years of exit planning, valuation, and exit execution working with business owners. Ed Mysogland has a mission and vision to help business owners understand the value of their business and what makes it salable. Most of the small business owner’s net worth is locked in the company; to unlock it, a business owner has to sell it. Unfortunately, the odds are against business owners that they won’t be able to sell their companies because they don’t know what creates a saleable asset.

Ed interviews battle-tested experts who help business owners prepare, build, preserve, and one-day transfer value with the sale of the business for maximum value.

How To Sell a Business Podcast is produced virtually from the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX® in Alpharetta.  The show can be found on all the major podcast apps and a full archive can be found here.

Ed is the Managing Partner of Indiana Business Advisors. He guides the development of the organization, its knowledge strategy, and the IBA initiative, which is to continue to be Indiana’s premier business brokerage by bringing investment-banker-caliber of transactional advisory services to small and mid-sized businesses. Over the last 29 years, Ed has been appraising and providing pre-sale consulting services for small and medium-size privately-held businesses as part of the brokerage process. He has worked with entrepreneurs of every pedigree and offers a unique insight into consulting with them toward a successful outcome.

Connect with Ed: LinkedIn | Twitter | Facebook

 

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:00] Business owners likely will have only one shot to sell a business. Most don’t understand what drives value and how buyers look at a business. Until now. Welcome to the How To Sell A Business Podcast, where every week we talk to the subject matter experts, advisors, and those around the deal table about how to sell at maximum value. Every business will go to sell one day. It’s only a matter of when. We’re glad you’re here. The podcast starts now.

Ed Mysogland: [00:00:35] In today’s podcast, I had the opportunity to interview Jason Beutler of RoboSource. I’ve known him for a while. He’s a friend and we’ve known each other through an organization called Truth at Work. So, I know him professionally as well as personally. And I can tell you he is probably one of the smartest people I have ever, ever plowed into.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:01] And so, today we’re going to be talking about automation and what that means for a seller to sell the company or a buyer that may be buying the company and how to maximize that investment. He talked a lot about where to identify those opportunities to automate the business. So, I am certain that you will get a lot from this episode. So, enjoy my conversation with Jason Beutler of RoboSource.

Ed Mysogland: [00:01:40] Welcome to another episode of How To Sell A Business Podcast. I’m your host, Ed Mysogland. I help business owners identify what creates value in their companies so that one day that they can sell at maximum value. Today, I have a good buddy of mine, Jason Beutler from RoboSource. So, Jason, tell us a little bit about RoboSource, and not too long because I got lots of questions for you.

Jason Beutler: [00:02:07] Thanks, Ed. So, RoboSource is a process automation company. We basically help businesses automate mundane, repetitive tasks within their business to maximize their time and get their people working on things that are more important and strategic to the business.

Ed Mysogland: [00:02:25] Well, as I was saying when we first got started, you know, there’s so much here and I guess I’m looking first, define automation for everybody.

Jason Beutler: [00:02:40] So, automation is essentially taking the work out of a human’s hands. So, letting the computer do the task that needs to be accomplished. So, it can be simple things such as one of our clients puts invoices into QuickBooks and they need to classify those invoices by salesperson. So, instead of having a human go through and classify that, the computer automates that process and does that for them.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:10] Okay. So, from the standpoint of that automation, because like I was telling you, I was beating up on one of our guys here today on you and I had an opportunity to work together and I couldn’t sell it to my partners. They were just fearful of what this meant to the business and the risk associated with it. So, where we ended up with was offshoring a lot of what we were talking about with automation.

Ed Mysogland: [00:03:43] So, I know like Zapier and If This Then That, and then you have your custom work, and then, in our case, offshoring. Is that kind of the lifecycle of automation that I’m scared to automate so I’m going to hire somebody at a lower cost and then I’m going to back into automation? Because at least I think that is our trajectory, you know what I mean? Go ahead.

Jason Beutler: [00:04:21] And I would say a lot of companies are doing that. So, let’s talk specifically about the different kinds of automation. So, there are three specific kinds, and RoboSource does all of them. So, to start, first, we’ve got the traditional software. So, traditional software is what we’ve been doing since, like, the ’50s, right? It’s building software that manages data and processes and helps you sort of automate the day-to-day. That’s where the warehouse systems, the ERPs, all of those came about. That was a form of automation and it’s still something that’s done a lot today.

Jason Beutler: [00:04:52] The second and more recent form of automation that’s come about are these low-code and no-code tools that you talked about, the Zapiers, the If This Then That, the Microsoft Make or Power Automate platforms. Those tools are, essentially, drag and drop so that you don’t have to have any concept on how to code, but you can still kind of automate and build in. They operate off of triggers. So, if something happens in one system, it will trigger this automation to happen and do something from there. So, you could say watch an inbox for an incoming email and trigger it to do something for you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:05:24] I got it.

Jason Beutler: [00:05:26] The last form of automation is what’s referred to as robotic process automation, and that’s a very new technology that’s come about where essentially you can mimic clicking on a desktop the way that a human would click on the desktop. So, if a human can click on buttons and move around on a website or an application, you now can write a software bot that will automate that for you.

Jason Beutler: [00:05:50] So, I say all of that in answering your question around how do we have these conversations and what’s the trajectory of adopting automation. Most people already are adopting automation in some way, shape, or form because they’re using software as a traditional form of software. It’s an area that they feel comfortable because we spent the last 20 years looking at it and dealing with that kind of automation. Where people get uncomfortable is when they see the bot clicking on the buttons for a human. That’s when they start to think, “Oh, where are humans making decisions that I would be uncomfortable having a bot make a decision.”

Jason Beutler: [00:06:29] And the problem is most people don’t know that. They don’t know the decisions that are being made, that a human’s being made when they’re clicking those buttons. And as a result they get a little bit uncomfortable. And so, that’s really where I start in those conversations, is, digging into what are the real decisions that are being made when you’re clicking these buttons.

Ed Mysogland: [00:06:46] Yeah. Give me an example of that. And I’m totally transparent, you can beat up on us all you want. I mean, when we were talking, I’m sitting here going, “All right. I can see it, but am I willing to risk it?” You know what I mean? I can see what you’re talking about, but am I willing to put, in this case, we were talking about inbound confidentiality agreements. We get about a thousand a month and we’re using DocuSign and this, that, and the other. And it’s like, “Okay.” What’s the risk and how do I understand what you’re talking about as far as the bot doing what it does to replace the person that is physically doing it for us now. So, how do I get comfortable with that?

Jason Beutler: [00:07:40] So, some of it is just mindset. The reason you’re comfortable having a human do that is because you trust the human’s decision making process. What’s interesting is the bot is going to make the same decision every time because it’s software. So, there are rules going to be defined around that that are going to have the bot make the same decision. It’s just uncomfortable for us because we’re not used to it.

Jason Beutler: [00:08:03] And this is the transition that’s happening I think in the ’20s right now, is, there’s starting to become more and more comfort with the fact that computers can actually make the decisions that humans have been making on issues like what you’re dealing with. And so, at the end of the day, those NDAs are vital to your organization and your business. It’s like a cornerstone of what you’re doing. Having the human click that button gives you a sense of warm fuzzies that you know someone had to sit there and make the right decision.

Ed Mysogland: [00:08:33] You’re right. But at the same time, I mean, after I hear you say that, I’m like, that is such a nice guy that’s doing it. But, you know, I’m sitting here going, “Well?” Because I can’t remember what the savings was. I mean, it was probably – I don’t know – ten bucks an hour or whatever doing all the processing. And I can’t remember what the financial mechanics were, but it was about a 95 percent savings, I think, something like that.

Jason Beutler: [00:09:11] Yeah. Probably.

Ed Mysogland: [00:09:11] And so, hearing myself say this, I’m like, “Oh, my gosh.” But you’re totally right. And I wanted to feel better about the decision. Like, if there was a problem, that guy was going to call me. And I’m afraid with a bot, the whole damn place falls apart before I know it. And so, how does that work? Where’s the tripwire to prevent my infrastructure to fall apart?

Jason Beutler: [00:09:49] Yeah. So, when looking at automation, one of the first things you want to look at is what happens on – what we call – the non-happy path, what happens in the exception cases. And really that’s where we plan our automations around, is, we know that the happy path, that’s going to work. But what happens when it’s not following that. So, that’s how you build the process. That’s where you want to make sure you’ve got the automation defined.

Jason Beutler: [00:10:15] So, in this instance, it would have been like here are the boundaries. Here are the scenarios, where if it falls within these boundaries, we’re going to go ahead and send out the NDA because we feel confident that we’re operating effectively. If it’s outside of this range, either there’s some form of maybe AI decision making we can go through to come to a better decision or we’re going to send it to a human to click the button for us.

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:39] Okay.

Jason Beutler: [00:10:40] Because not all automation has to be 100 percent hands off, and I think that’s another area that people don’t understand. The 80/20 rule applies here. How much more time would you get if we could get rid of 80 percent of the scenario and you only have to deal with 20 percent of it?

Ed Mysogland: [00:10:58] You’re right. I mean, you’re totally right. But at the same time, I’m looking at it like in our process. The NDA came in, RoboSource was going to write the NDA to our CRM, but that’s where it stopped. Because we had 16 people, whose client does that belong to? And that’s where the rub was, was how does the bot know? And now, after I’ve gotten away from it, you were like, “Well, simple. You just see whose client was tagged and you’re off to the races and then it’ll do it for you.” And that leads me to my next question of, how much of a process can this be automated? I mean, how many steps is a typical automation?

Jason Beutler: [00:12:04] So, we’ve done automations that are as small as two to three steps, just because they do them in high volume, to we’ve done automations that have as many as about 400 steps, and that’s more on the mortgage side. And we’ve also done some work with a nonprofit processing incoming transcripts, where they’re extracting content out of a high school transcript and putting it into a system and running them through some approval processes. So, those are massive processes that are very long running, potentially running three, four months even.

Ed Mysogland: [00:12:43] Okay. So, you just said, a bot is scanning a transcript and extracting the paragraph. What are they extracting?

Jason Beutler: [00:12:55] It’s extracting the semester, the class, and the grade, as well as the grade point average, what school they went to.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:02] I got it. I got it. But it’s not, like, reading the essay and pulling –

Jason Beutler: [00:13:09] Oh. No.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:10] I got it. I was like, “Oh, my gosh.” So, one of the biggest reasons I wanted you on here was we have the baby boomers that are looking to sell businesses, and you hear it all the time. And the challenge we have is coming from the other side, the buyers are looking at it on, “Hey, I want a really well operated business.” But at the same time, I got to figure out, not only how I get my money back from the acquisition, but how do I grow this.

Ed Mysogland: [00:13:55] And they’re finding good companies, and that’s part of the problem. When I say problem, that’s part of the challenge. From the buy side, it’s like, “Okay. I want a really good company. But at the same time, I’m trying to elongate a business that is perhaps on the mature side of the company lifecycle.” From the seller’s side, I’m sitting here saying, “Okay. If I have enough runway, I want to put some of this in so I can maximize, not only the earnings pre-sale, but also it’s already set up for the next guy.”

Ed Mysogland: [00:14:34] I mean, you can look at it both ways. Well, from my standpoint, I think I would look at it from the buyer standpoint. When I’m looking at a business, how do I look at automation? Are there industries that are ripe for it? Are there processes that this is the low lying fruit that you can have immediate value impact?

Jason Beutler: [00:14:58] Yeah. Talking to that specifically, I have a client that ended up selling their business in the industry they were in. And the reason being is there was a PE firm that was coming in and looking to buy something in their industry. And because we’d been working with them, their overhead was 35 percent less than their competitors. And they got sucked up as a result of it and he had a pretty good exit.

Jason Beutler: [00:15:22] So, it is something that’s of a lot of value. And you can create scenarios where the automation is actually a differentiator. I think from the buy standpoint, the things that I would be looking for are places where there is human repetitive action. I mean, at the end of the day, computers are going to be better at that. Computers are really good at doing repetitive tasks, that’s what they’re made to do.

Jason Beutler: [00:15:50] And so, if we’re seeing things where people are taking paper and keying it into systems or people are having to key in two or three different systems – which is common. I run into that probably three or four times a week – where we’ve got to put it into our inventory system, our CRM, and our ERP in some way, shape, or form, or our finance system. So, we’re literally putting the same client in three different places. Those are areas where you’re going to see a lot of automation opportunities show up very quickly and you’re going to save quite a bit of time and money off of that.

Ed Mysogland: [00:16:19] So then, it begs the question, what do I deploy? Like, for example, I am a Mac guy. I have Text Expander. I’ve got this thing called Hazel that moves my files and stuff like that. When do you say, “You know what? I need custom. I need somebody to come in, evaluate, and build this thing out.” As opposed to, “I think I’m going to try this Zapier thing. I’m going to click on it and here’s my trigger and here’s the next step.” But it’s just one step. So, how do I – I don’t want to say work with someone like you, but how do I know what I don’t know? Because, truly, most people don’t have no clue about this stuff.

Jason Beutler: [00:17:21] Yeah. So, tools like Zapier are extremely powerful and they do make it available for individuals who don’t understand necessarily all the intricate behind the scenes working of a computer to be able to do some basic automations. It’s when you start to get into the more complex decision making processes that you’re probably going to want to bring in somebody who understands.

Jason Beutler: [00:17:44] Automation is the intersection between data, business, and software. You’ve got to understand data analytics, which gets into artificial intelligence. You’ve got to understand how to build software. Because at the end of the day, a computer is going to operate in a different way than a human would operate, and understanding how that works makes sense. But if you don’t understand business, then automation is just going to be a waste of your time. So, you’re at that intersection point.

Jason Beutler: [00:18:10] I would say if you’re doing automation and you’re getting to the point where you’re like, “Wow. There are acronyms coming up that I don’t know what they mean. Things like O off, things like APIs, they’re starting to show up because I’m trying to do more complicated things.” That’s when you probably want to bring in somebody who’s been there.

Ed Mysogland: [00:18:27] I got it. And for somebody like me mixing and matching a RoboSource with my dabbling of Zapier and stuff like that, that’s probably a bad idea, isn’t it?

Jason Beutler: [00:18:47] There’s some advantage to putting it all into a single location, but there’s nothing that’s going to keep you from being successful in that environment. So, a lot of automations are now operating inside the Cloud. And by the Cloud, we basically just mean someone else’s computer on the internet, which is really all that that’s meaning. So, as a result, you can use Zapier to do some of your more basic things.

Jason Beutler: [00:19:11] And when you get into what we refer to as intelligent automation or hyper automation, where you’re really trying to accelerate some things or make some decisions, you might want to send it off to maybe an Azure with a cognitive services behind the scenes. And I just went all geeky on people, but, you know.

Ed Mysogland: [00:19:25] I got it. And, again, this isn’t an ad for Zapier even though it sounds like it. It’s more from the standpoint of I don’t know what I don’t know, but I read all this. And not many people are saying these are the people that will come in, evaluate your process, and automate it. Versus, “Hey, gain five hours to your day by using Zapier.” So, I’m with you.

Ed Mysogland: [00:20:10] So, one of the things that I was writing about is, in business valuation, recurring revenue is pretty high up on the value hierarchy. Conversely, if I look at automation, I am optimizing, basically, the engine of the company. So, I know you were saying what’s a human doing, the data entry, and so on and so forth. I’m assuming accounting is right off the bat because I heard you mentioned QuickBooks. Where else should I be looking? Let’s just take a manufacturing company. Where am I looking for a manufacturing company?

Jason Beutler: [00:21:13] Work orders, what that work order process look like, how is that coming through. We do a lot with purchase orders. We do a lot on invoice processing. Finance comes up quite often. And specifically also, when you start getting into debt reconciliations across banks, credit card processing across banks, making sure that you’re standardizing all those accounts and everything all lines up, that’s a lot of manual work that can be automated and those decisions can be made.

Ed Mysogland: [00:21:46] I got it. I was interviewing a guy that optimizes CPA practices. And one of the things that he was saying that was coming down the pike is taking a person’s tax return, scanning it in, extracting the tax return for the next guy to do their analysis. And I assume the IRS does something like that already. I mean, from a procedural standpoint, it’s looking at the image and it’s looking at a particular area and it’s extracting what is in that pixel. I mean, is that how it does it?

Jason Beutler: [00:22:45] So, that’s hard to explain without getting into the science behind it all. But, essentially, yes, that’s basically what it’s doing, is, it is looking at the image structure and it’s an array of pixels, so it’s an array of colors. And it’s looking at those colors and it’s identifying patterns around those.

Jason Beutler: [00:23:06] Now, something to note on PDFs is not all PDFs are scans. A lot of PDFs are actually printed. And that’s actually a different underlying structure. So, if it’s a printed PDF from, like, an application and you print it to file, that actually has the text embedded in it and that text is a lot easier to pull out.

Ed Mysogland: [00:23:28] That’s the OCR or no?

Jason Beutler: [00:23:31] OCR is going to work off of the scanned images because that’s doing optical character recognition. And that’s where you’re going to take a scan or a picture and it’s going to figure out what the words are. And that’s pretty accurate but it’s going to run into some issues. Then, I’d say most PDFs that are received these days now are in QuickBooks. You hit print a PDF and it comes out as a really pretty formatted PDF. That’s actually not an image. That’s actually a text embedded document that you can go behind the scenes and pull that text out directly.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:03] I had no idea. And that’s how you’re able to do it with purchase orders. I get it.

Jason Beutler: [00:24:14] Yes.

Ed Mysogland: [00:24:15] Okay. So, everybody gets all shook up about employees that the employees are being replaced by robots. I mean, I know it’s true. But I’m trying to figure out whether or not that’s a bad thing, you know?

Jason Beutler: [00:24:40] Yeah. And one of the thoughts I’ve had around that recently is we’ve had recently The Great Resignation, and now we have quiet quitting. So, we’ve got our workforce saying, I don’t want to do things that I don’t feel are important. I don’t want to work in a place or work on work that isn’t meaningful and impactful. I want my day to matter. And then, we say, “Okay. Let’s automate some of the meaningless work.” And everyone’s up in arms about we’re replacing jobs. I’m not seeing it line up. And I see the workforce basically begging to work on more important things. So, why wouldn’t we automate away the things that, basically, they’re already saying they don’t want to do?

Ed Mysogland: [00:25:24] Wow. Out of everything you’ve said, that’s probably the most impactful for me. Because you’re exactly right, you know, if you can take away the mundane and give them the opportunity to maximize whether it be creativity or whatever, I got to imagine it’ll improve corporate culture and retention. I never looked at it that way. That’s a great way to look at it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:26:02] So, I’m trying to determine if I have two businesses and one has automation, one has people doing it. I’m trying to determine risk. You follow? I mean, on the automated side, you’re saying, “Look. I got a bot doing all this. There is no risk. The only risk is it breaking.” On this side, I have people, and they do break, they make mistakes. But yet I’m trying to determine if I’m the buyer looking at the business, am I intuitively thinking that the business with people is less risky than the automated one? You know what I mean?

Ed Mysogland: [00:26:57] Like, if you have a buyer that shows up and they see the automation, am I sitting here going, “You know, I think that’s a business for me” versus I got these people. I’m great at managing people. I’m great at maximizing their efficiency, and so on and so forth. What do you say to that? I mean, that’s a hard one, right?

Jason Beutler: [00:27:27] Yeah, it is. And, to me, I guess it comes down to how far out you’re looking. So, if you’re looking out just a couple of years, then, yeah, go with what you’re comfortable with. But if you look back at history, and let’s just take Stud, Studebaker, Duesenberg, they could build cars, but they’re not around. Why? Because someone came along and made it more efficient and figured out how to do things more efficiently than they were able to do things. And, eventually, it got to the point where, competitively, they couldn’t keep up.

Jason Beutler: [00:28:04] And I guess the question I would have is, if you’re looking at a business that is primarily people driven versus one that has a lot of automation driving it, how long out are you looking? Because if you’re looking at long term, your competitive advantage is going to come with automation. And why is that? It’s an asset you own and it’s an asset that’s scalable. So, if you need to go twice as fast, it’s a bot. You literally can push buttons and have it go twice as fast.

Jason Beutler: [00:28:31] If you all of a sudden are like I need to scale way back because recession or something’s hit, you can push buttons and scale it way back. You’ve got flexibility that you wouldn’t have with people necessarily. Not to say that the people aren’t vital because there’s strategic and relational and things that really only people can do that you want to make sure you got the right people doing that. But in terms of the day-to-day operations, I would say it depends on your duration.

Ed Mysogland: [00:28:57] You know what? It’s fascinating that you say that, because the holding period for a business tends to be long. And you talk about getting financing to buy companies and you’re talking about a ten year amortization. And if you think about what has transpired in the last ten years – and I can’t remember what the term is about technology, how fast it’s changing – but there’s some —

Jason Beutler: [00:29:30] Doubles every seven years.

Ed Mysogland: [00:29:31] Yeah, that too. So, if I’m a buyer, I mean, you’re exactly right. As I look at business owners, especially the ones that are looking to retire, buyers are evaluating where are they on that lifecycle. And I would imagine that there’s a lot of businesses that aren’t marketable because of where they’re at in the life cycle as opposed to, “Hey. I think I can fix this.”

Ed Mysogland: [00:30:07] Now, I’ll tell you, there’s some guys that are rolling up foundries. And these guys, I love watching what they’re doing and that’s exactly what they’re doing. I mean, the foundries, that business hasn’t changed in decades. And they’re coming in and just retooling it, make it more efficient economies of scale. Those are the type of buyers, I think, are probably we’re going to see more of over the next half-a-decade or so.

Ed Mysogland: [00:30:46] As a vendor, it’s one thing for me to hire you to fix my stuff. It’s another thing having somebody on site to be – I call it and I’m seeing more and more – chief automation officers. Do I need that or is an outsourced vendor like yourself adequate? You know what I mean?

Jason Beutler: [00:31:11] Yeah. I would say, right now you’re not going to find a lot of people that are going to be qualified to be a chief automation officer. It’s a relatively new concept. And it is going to be a unique skill set, as we talked earlier about that blend between data analytics and AI, having software development background and process orientation, but also having enough business acumen to know how to automate and run the business.

Jason Beutler: [00:31:37] So, what I find works best is to take the AI and software component and outsource that, but keep the business acumen in-house. So, take a subject matter expert, somebody operationally that understands what’s going on, and partner them with somebody, like us, that can provide the technical oversight and the technical aspects. Most businesses will have some form of technology on staff, but not necessarily the automation technology. And these days you don’t need it to be in-house. You can leave that outsourced. Personally, I think you’ll be better served that way because you’ll be able to get some economies of scale off of that.

Jason Beutler: [00:32:18] So, with a partnership between your in-house subject matter expert and outsourced or consultative help on the technology front, I think you can accomplish the technology and the support of it in a very effective manner without having to go bring in a chief automation officer, which is frankly going to increase all your infrastructure costs as well.

Ed Mysogland: [00:32:42] I got it. So, I’m certain every buyer that is listening to this is going to say, what are the industries that are ripe for me to go target? And you said, those that are heavy in paper. But are there any particular businesses or industries or the types of businesses that – I know you said – paper heavy, but any industries that come to mind that if I’m a buyer, because you may be a buyer, Jason, where are you looking to buy?

Jason Beutler: [00:33:27] Right now, the clients I’m running into the most often are insurance. Mortgage is actually coming up all the time right now. I’m running into mortgage applications and mortgage underwriting almost daily on that front. So, those are two areas that I’m hitting often. Banking is starting to show up a lot more, though they do have more of their internal systems that they’re able to run on. The other on I’m hitting is health care, health care billing. It is the Wild West out there. And the opportunity to standardize and automate on that is huge.

Ed Mysogland: [00:34:07] I also heard HOA, so that was one that kind of caught me by surprise. I didn’t think of that in my research for our talk. It seems as though anything that has an application, whether some use Google forms and that will bring it in. Others, especially like apartments, where somebody comes in and actually fills out an application. Those are our candidates. We talked a little bit about manufacturing. CPAs are definitely trying to automate. Yeah, so that’s really interesting.

Ed Mysogland: [00:35:03] So, you said something earlier about you own this process. Does it have to be updated? What’s the security? How do I protect, like whatever, open source? You know, that’s open to the world, right? So, I have this proprietary. I engage you. I have a proprietary process. How do I protect that? And is it really mine or is it yours?

Jason Beutler: [00:35:37] So, the process is yours. That being said, it is implemented inside of a piece of software. So, most of these tools nowadays are built inside of tools. You’ll hear things called UiPath, Blue Prism, Microsoft Power Automate, Logic Apps. There’s a whole series of these tools that you will implement the automation inside of. So, while the process is your intellectual property and how it executes is specific to you, it is somewhat proprietary to the software that it’s been built inside of. That being said, you could take that software, implement it in another location, and move that process into that, and have no trouble at all running it.

Jason Beutler: [00:36:20] So, just to make sure we’re clear on that, security, that is a challenge. Now, we talked about the different kinds of automation, right? The low-code, no-code, the traditional software, and the RPA. RPA security, which is the desktop automation, that’s a little more straightforward because it’s literally logging in like a human one. So, it’s the same security that you have. If you put a username and password in and navigate a site or navigate an application, that’s the way the software bot is going to go. So, you can control the security the same way you would on a user.

Jason Beutler: [00:36:52] When you get into the traditional software and some of the low-code stuff, security gets to be pretty challenging. There are what are referred to as application programming interfaces or APIs. Those have a series of security, they’re called tokens. You use tools like OAuth, which is open authentication to integrate with them all. If you’re starting to get into a lot of that, you probably want to call a software guy because you’re getting into some pretty low level security type of things. But those are all built into these tools these days, so you’re not having to necessarily figure it out. You just have to know how to implement it.

Ed Mysogland: [00:37:31] So, I’m a consumer and I sit here and go, “All right. Exactly what does RoboSource do for me? What does a guy like Jason do?” You know, it’s being protected, so it’s design. So, I know you’re designing it. I don’t know why I’m talking for you. So, let me turn it over to you, what is Jason doing in my world? What are you doing for me?

Jason Beutler: [00:38:05] So, first and foremost is, we’ve built a ton of these, so we understand the pitfalls. So, when we sit down and work with on a process with you, we’re going to essentially know how to make this process operate and we’ll build from that standpoint. Second is we build it. Most of our clients do not know how to build out software. They don’t know the appropriate ways, the best way to build that automation. So, with our architects and our experience, we build that out for you.

Jason Beutler: [00:38:31] So, not only do we plan out how it should look, we build it for you, and then we support it. Meaning, you don’t have to worry about it at all. We just take care of it. We’ll specifically give you an app that shows you real time what your software bot is doing. And if anything breaks, we’re looking at it. So, we’re writing software and tools to handle all those scenarios you said earlier where it’s like, “I want to know this thing broke before it breaks. I want to be ahead of it.” We’re doing all of that.

Jason Beutler: [00:38:59] That’s the monitoring and systems that we put in place, and that’s the platform that we’re building out, is to make sure that all that is safe and secure and that somebody is looking at it. We can catch the anomalies before they happen. If something breaks, we got it fixed as quickly as we can to keep your business up and running. So, that’s what we’re doing on that front is we’re essentially providing automation as a service for you so you don’t have to know anything about how to automate. You just have to know that you’ve got something that you want automated, and we’ll take it from there.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:27] And if I’m not mistaken, how you get paid is based on the automate the event, right.

Jason Beutler: [00:39:37] Correct. Yeah. So, similar to electricity, we scale by usage.

Ed Mysogland: [00:39:45] Okay. I get it. So, have you done any studies on the ROI to this stuff? Knowing you, you probably have. So, what kind of ROI should someone expect by doing it?

Jason Beutler: [00:40:02] So, the ROI that we’ve seen, let’s kind of break down how the costs look. Typically, there’s an upfront cost that comes into building out the process in some way, shape, or form. Similar to if you were to onboard somebody, you’re going to have an upfront training cost, right? Getting up to speed. You’re going to have that same type of cost with getting the software built or getting the automation built. After that, then there is sort of the monthly recurring usage based fees that come out of it.

Jason Beutler: [00:40:30] What we’ve seen is we’re saving anywhere between 35 and 50 percent from a human on that monthly recurring level. Depending upon the automation, it can get as high as, like, 80, 90 percent. But conservatively, we’re saying between 35 and 50. So, given that, what I see across most of my clients is about a six month payback period, six to nine months at the most in year one. But, remember, that includes the implementation fee. So, by year two, your savings are phenomenal. And so, we’re seeing in the second year, you’re often spending a quarter of what you were the year before.

Ed Mysogland: [00:41:10] I got it. All right. I want to be sensitive to your time, so at the end of every episode I always ask, what’s the one piece of advice that you could give our listeners that would make the most immediate impact on their business? Go ahead, I dare you to say automate.

Jason Beutler: [00:41:32] I mean, along those lines, though, I guess I would say busy is the new broke. So, when you’re broke, you don’t have enough money to focus on and to put towards the things you should, let alone the things you want to do. The same is true when you’re busy. So, if you’re busy, you don’t have enough time to focus on the things you should be focusing on, let alone the things that you want to be focusing on.

Jason Beutler: [00:41:57] And you really only have two options. You can delegate and you can automate. Those are your only two options in order to get your time back. And really, at the end of the day, time is the resource we’re managing as business owners and business leaders. So, I guess automation is a new thing. You need to learn it. It’s half your solution. It’s half the possible solutions that are out there. And I think that’s an important aspect and something to think about.

Ed Mysogland: [00:42:24] Yeah, you’re exactly right. And I really appreciate how you look at that, that this is not so much about costs as it is about time. I get it. So, what’s the best way that we can find you?

Jason Beutler: [00:42:49] Website, robosource.us. You can always email me, jason.beutler@robosource.us. And then, my phone number as well.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:01] Okay. And we’ll have all of that in the show notes. Super easy. All right, oh, buddy. Thanks for taking the time. I know this is the future. And I’ve been following along for quite some time about buyers and what’s inducing them to buy businesses. And so, I am so grateful for your generosity to spend some time with us today and and talk about how we can make businesses either more marketable, or post sale, how to maximize the buy. So, thanks so much for hanging out with me.

Jason Beutler: [00:43:45] Hey, it was fun. I appreciate it. And I look forward to talking to you again soon.

Ed Mysogland: [00:43:49] Sounds good. Thanks, buddy.

Outro: [00:43:52] Thank you for joining us today on the How To Sell A Business Podcast. If you want more episodes packed with strategies to help sell your business for the maximum value, visit howtosellabusinesspodcast.com for tips and best practices to make your exit life changing. Better yet, subscribe now so you never miss future episodes. This program is copyrighted by Myso, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

Tagged With: automation, bots, Business Owners, business process, business value, Ed Mysogland, exit planning, How to Sell a Business Podcast, how to sell my business, how to sell your business, Jason Beutler, Notre Dame, process improvement, RoboSource, Sell my business

  • 1
  • 2
  • Next Page »

Business RadioX ® Network


 

Our Most Recent Episode

CONNECT WITH US

  • Email
  • Facebook
  • LinkedIn
  • Twitter
  • YouTube

Our Mission

We help local business leaders get the word out about the important work they’re doing to serve their market, their community, and their profession.

We support and celebrate business by sharing positive business stories that traditional media ignores. Some media leans left. Some media leans right. We lean business.

Sponsor a Show

Build Relationships and Grow Your Business. Click here for more details.

Partner With Us

Discover More Here

Terms and Conditions
Privacy Policy

Connect with us

Want to keep up with the latest in pro-business news across the network? Follow us on social media for the latest stories!
  • Email
  • Facebook
  • Google+
  • LinkedIn
  • Twitter
  • YouTube

Business RadioX® Headquarters
1000 Abernathy Rd. NE
Building 400, Suite L-10
Sandy Springs, GA 30328

© 2025 Business RadioX ® · Rainmaker Platform

BRXStudioCoversLA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of LA Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversDENVER

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Denver Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversPENSACOLA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Pensacola Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversBIRMINGHAM

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Birmingham Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversTALLAHASSEE

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Tallahassee Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversRALEIGH

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Raleigh Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversRICHMONDNoWhite

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Richmond Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversNASHVILLENoWhite

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Nashville Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversDETROIT

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Detroit Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversSTLOUIS

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of St. Louis Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversCOLUMBUS-small

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Columbus Business Radio

Coachthecoach-08-08

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Coach the Coach

BRXStudioCoversBAYAREA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Bay Area Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversCHICAGO

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Chicago Business Radio

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Atlanta Business Radio